{"title":"IT operations \u0026 system management – Templates","description":"\u003cp\u003ePlan and document the ongoing management of IT systems. Find templates for system inventories, CMDB, access administration, service catalogues, change control, releases, migration, monitoring and decommissioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose these tools for operational documentation. Supplier agreements, cybersecurity regulations and business continuity planning are separate topics. The templates perform no technical actions and provide no security certification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the document language, contents and formats on each product page. Word, PDF and\/or Excel are specified there.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eRelated: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/it-avtal-digitala-tjanster-mallar\"\u003eIT agreements\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"\/en\/collections\/nis2-cybersakerhet-mallar\"\u003eCybersecurity\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"\/en\/pages\/dokumentmallar-kategorier\"\u003eAll template categories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"it-offboarding-behorighetsavslut-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf","title":"IT Offboarding \u0026 Access Termination 2026\/2027 – Excel, Word \u0026 PDF","description":"\u003csection class=\"mb-product-content\" lang=\"en\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Offboarding \u0026amp; Access Termination 2026\/2027\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical digital template package for companies, associations, and organizations that need to terminate user accounts, document revoked system permissions, reclaim IT equipment, and ensure that nothing important falls through the cracks between HR, IT, and operations when an employee or consultant leaves. The package combines an \u003cstrong\u003eExcel register with a dashboard\u003c\/strong\u003e, IT checklist, access protocol, equipment and data handover, an editable SOP, a separate user guide, and an English working reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cnav aria-label=\"About the document template\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAbout the document template:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"#mb-ingar\"\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-excel\"\u003eThe Excel tool\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-process\"\u003eHow to use the package\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-juridik\"\u003eInformation security and GDPR\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-faq\"\u003eFAQ\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-kallor\"\u003eSources\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/nav\u003e\n\u003caside style=\"padding:16px;background:#E7F3EB;border-left:4px solid #287B4F;border-radius:7px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSource and technically reviewed: October 10, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e Version 1.0, intended for 2026\/2027 and the Swedish organizational context. The document package is an administrative security and follow-up aid. It is not a legally certified solution, a system for automatically deactivating accounts, or a guarantee of GDPR, NIS2, or other legal compliance.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-ingar\"\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eWhat it is used for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Offboarding \u0026amp; Access Register\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExcel with seven sheets, dashboard, 100 termination cases, 200 system permissions, 120 equipment items, and 160 actions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExcel (XLSX)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Offboarding – Checklist\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCheckpoints before termination, technical shutdown, returns, data protection, and signing.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAccess Revocation – Protocol\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDocument account, disabled access, date, actual technical verification, and any exceptions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Equipment \u0026amp; Data Handover\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eReceipt for computers and other equipment, as well as checking information ownership, archiving, and appropriate security measures.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Termination Procedure \/ SOP\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGoverning document for division of responsibility, risk-based process, follow-up, and documented exceptions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDetailed User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStep-by-step, register fields, common mistakes, delimitations, sources, and control routines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Offboarding – English Working Reference\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEnglish working version of core checklists and verification fields, intended for Swedish conditions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal 13 files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 editable Word documents, 6 searchable A4 PDF files, and 1 Excel workbook. The files are delivered as a ZIP. Excel requires no macros.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-excel\"\u003eExcel tool with control panel and follow-up\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included Excel tool is a local register for documented IT offboarding. In the \u003cstrong\u003eTermination Cases\u003c\/strong\u003e tab, each person\/assignment is registered with a unique termination ID and internal contact person. The same ID is used in the separate tabs for \u003cstrong\u003ePermissions\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eEquipment\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003eActions\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows a termination case to encompass multiple system accounts, inventory items, and checkpoints without mixing up the history. The dashboard summarizes registered, verified, open, and overdue entries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSystem access:\u003c\/strong\u003e document identity accounts, VPN, SSO, MFA, administrator roles, cloud services, SaaS, and vendor accounts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVerification:\u003c\/strong\u003e specify revoked access, verification \"Yes,\" and verification date only after actual technical control in the respective system.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEquipment return:\u003c\/strong\u003e track inventory ID, planned return, receipt, and exceptions separately from system permissions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkflows:\u003c\/strong\u003e create checkpoints for accounts, licenses, physical access, API keys, data handover, and risk-based follow-up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarning flags:\u003c\/strong\u003e status calculations highlight, for example, overdue dates and missing information.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInstruction and examples:\u003c\/strong\u003e built-in guidance and a separate, fictitious demonstration sheet that does not affect the dashboard.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Excel does not remove permissions, lock computers, delete emails, revoke tokens, or send automatic notifications. A green status is based on what the user has registered and must be confirmed against the actual system status.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-process\"\u003eHow to use the templates step by step\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDetermine a correct termination case:\u003c\/strong\u003e Check with HR or the assignment owner regarding the date and security process that applies. The actual termination of employment is decided and documented separately.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory access:\u003c\/strong\u003e List the organization's IT systems, remote access, shared accounts, and any privileges. Specifically identify high-risk permissions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssign responsibility:\u003c\/strong\u003e Decide who carries out account changes, who verifies them, and who takes over files, clients, or business-critical processes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePerform shutdown:\u003c\/strong\u003e Close or change access according to the established time, and register the action only when it has actually been performed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVerify:\u003c\/strong\u003e Document the check in the administrative console, log, or ticket system. Do not enter passwords, keys, or secret tokens into Excel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHandle equipment and data:\u003c\/strong\u003e Acknowledge return and assess the need for business data, deletion, and preservation in a separate approved process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFinal review:\u003c\/strong\u003e Follow up on open items, document exceptions with the risk owner, and save the approval according to the organization's routine.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-juridik\"\u003eAccess termination, GDPR, and labor law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePractical guidance on termination:\u003c\/strong\u003e Read our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/foretag\/it-offboarding-behorighetsavslut-checklista-anstalld-slutar-2026\"\u003eIT Offboarding Checklist for access termination when employees or consultants leave\u003c\/a\u003e. The guide shows which accounts should be reviewed, how email and files are handled with regard to GDPR, and why implemented blocks need to be verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIMY (Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection) guidance:\u003c\/strong\u003e Permissions should be need-based and changed when job tasks change. When staff leaves, it is especially important to immediately stop access to systems and information and to follow up on the routines. A standardized process can make it easier to avoid residual permissions. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/vanliga-fragor-och-svar\/hur-ska-vi-tanka-kring-behorighetssstyrning-da-personal-slutar\/\"\u003eRead IMY's guidance on permissions when employees leave\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWork computers and cloud folders may contain personal data. The organization therefore needs a legal basis, a defined purpose, access restrictions, and an appropriate routine for preservation and erasure. A termination protocol does \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c\/strong\u003e provide a general right to read a former employee's private communication, and a computer should not be automatically erased without consideration of business data and legal obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLabor law delimitation:\u003c\/strong\u003e The documents do not replace notices of termination, employment contracts, labor law\/MBL processes, collective agreement checks, holiday pay, employer certificates, or payroll administration. An equipment receipt does not automatically mean that an employer has the right to make salary deductions. The application of information security rules, sector requirements, and any security-sensitive agreements must be assessed for the specific organization.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003caside style=\"padding:15px;background:#FFF3D8;border-left:4px solid #CB9335;border-radius:7px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSecurity advice:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do not save passwords, personal identification numbers, full access keys, or secret system information in the spreadsheet. The file itself does not automatically have encryption, role-based access, or an audit log. Use a protected storage space and supplement it with the organization's own IT\/HR systems.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-faq\"\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs IT offboarding the same as terminating an employee?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. IT offboarding refers to the technical and organizational control of permissions, equipment, and information. The legal process for terminating an employment is handled separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Excel automatically close Microsoft 365, Google Workspace, or VPN?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Permissions must be revoked directly in the respective system or via the organization's access management solution and then verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a consultant or external supplier be included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Termination cases can be registered for both employees and external individuals, as long as the organization adapts the applicable agreements, processes, and personal data handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many entries fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e100 termination cases, 200 permission entries, 120 equipment entries, and 160 control actions are prepared in version 1.0.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens to old email accounts and documents?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAssess need, legal basis, access, and storage separately. The template does not perform archiving or deletion and does not provide a general right to read private information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the templates ready for NIS2 or ISO 27001?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThey can be useful in local security work, but do not constitute a complete management standard, certification, or a guarantee that all requirements according to applicable rules are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs Swedish and English included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Swedish main documents and the Excel tool are supplemented by a separate English working reference for Swedish organizations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need macros or a subscription?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, the Excel workbook is macro-free and intended to be used locally in a compatible spreadsheet program. It requires no connection to other systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-kallor\"\u003eOfficial sources and related products\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/vanliga-fragor-och-svar\/hur-ska-vi-tanka-kring-behorighetssstyrning-da-personal-slutar\/\"\u003eIMY – Access management when staff leaves\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/vi-guidar-dig\/personuppgifter-i-anstalldas-datorer\/\"\u003eIMY – Personal data in employees' computers\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/dataskydd-pa-olika-omraden\/arbetsliv\/tillaten-behandling--vilka-krav-galler\/grundlaggande-principer\/\"\u003eIMY – Data protection principles in the workplace\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/utrustningskvittens-inventarieregister-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eEquipment Receipt \u0026amp; Inventory Register\u003c\/a\u003e – for separate equipment registration and return receipts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/besoksregister-entreprenorslogg-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eVisitor Register \u0026amp; Contractor Log\u003c\/a\u003e – for external contractors and access control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat and delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital ZIP with editable Word\/Excel files and searchable PDF versions. No physical item is sent. For particularly sensitive terminations, relevant IT security, data protection, and labor law experts should participate in the assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55682015789398,"sku":"IT-OFFBOARDING-BEHORIGHETSAVSLUT-2027","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/it-offboarding-behorighetsavslut-2027-hero.png?v=1791627641"},{"product_id":"it-onboarding-behorighetsbestallning-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf","title":"IT Onboarding \u0026 Access Requests 2026\/2027 – Excel, Word \u0026 PDF","description":"\u003csection class=\"mb-product-content\" lang=\"en\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Onboarding \u0026amp; Access Request 2026\/2027\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional template package for companies, associations, IT departments, and organizations that need to document the ordering, needs assessment, approval, technical provisioning, and verification of IT access rights. The package includes an \u003cstrong\u003eExcel register with a dashboard\u003c\/strong\u003e, access request form, separate needs and risk assessment, verification protocol, IT procedure (SOP), detailed Swedish user guide, and an English work reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cnav aria-label=\"About the document template\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAbout the document template:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"#mb-ingar\"\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-excel\"\u003eExcel tool\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-flode\"\u003eHow to use the package\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-juridik\"\u003eGDPR and IT security\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-faq\"\u003eFAQ\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-kallor\"\u003eRegulatory sources\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/nav\u003e\n\u003caside style=\"padding:16px;background:#E7F3EA;border-left:4px solid #26774E;border-radius:7px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSource and technically reviewed: October 10, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e Version 1.0, intended for 2026\/2027. The review covers template structure, calculation logic, and specified regulatory sources. The product is not an authority-approved form, a certificate, or a guarantee that a specific operation complies with GDPR, the Cybersecurity Act, or sector-specific regulations.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-ingar\"\u003eWhat is included in the template package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eContent\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Onboarding Register and Dashboard\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSeven tabs with overview, up to 100 cases, 250 access records, and 160 actions, control points, instructions, and a separate dummy example.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExcel (XLSX)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAccess Request\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCase ID, user, job role, services and systems, least privilege access, validity, requirements, and authorization.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNeeds and Risk Assessment\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSeparate assessment of access needs, permission levels, privileges, MFA, personal data risks, and risk decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProvisioning and Verification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIT protocol for actual provisioning in systems, execution checks, and independent follow-up verification.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Onboarding Procedure (SOP)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal process description including roles, decision paths, access provisioning, deviation management, and reassessment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDetailed User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStep-by-step instructions, field explanations, legal limitations, common mistakes, secure storage, and regulatory sources.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Onboarding \u0026amp; Access Request\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEnglish work reference for ordering, approval, and technical verification within a Swedish operation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal of 13 files:\u003c\/strong\u003e six editable DOCX files, six searchable A4 PDFs, and one Excel workbook. Everything is delivered digitally as a ZIP file. The Excel file is macro-free and requires no separate subscription.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-excel\"\u003eThe Excel tool: cases, system access, and follow-up\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOverview:\u003c\/strong\u003e shows the number of registered cases, ordered and verified access rights, pending approvals, pending technical provisioning, remaining verifications, and overdue actions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCases:\u003c\/strong\u003e one unique case ID per person or role change, responsible manager, start date, and case status.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAccess Rights:\u003c\/strong\u003e one row per system and permission role, including work requirements, risk level, approval from manager\/system owner, technical provisioning, actual verification, and any additional risk approval.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eActions:\u003c\/strong\u003e responsibility, task, deadline, completion date, and automatic warning for passed internal deadlines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eControl Points:\u003c\/strong\u003e 20 pre-prepared checks regarding requirements, authorization, MFA, shared accounts, segregation of duties, and post-verification.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInstructions and Example:\u003c\/strong\u003e a short work guide in Excel and a dummy example tab that does not affect the dashboard.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn access right is shown as \u003cstrong\u003eVerified\u003c\/strong\u003e only when the necessary approvals have been registered, technical provisioning has been confirmed, and the actual verification (including date) has been filled in. High-risk access rights also require a separately registered risk approval in the tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003caside style=\"background:#FFF3D8;border-left:4px solid #BE8A27;border-radius:7px;padding:16px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Excel does not create user accounts, grant permissions, send emails or notifications, or verify the actual system state. Status is based on user input. Administrative registration is not a technical proof of access.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-flode\"\u003eHow to use the IT Onboarding package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRegister the case:\u003c\/strong\u003e enter a unique reference, current assignment, responsible manager, and planned start date.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIdentify least privilege:\u003c\/strong\u003e document which systems and roles are actually needed, for which task, and for how long.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eConduct needs and risk assessment:\u003c\/strong\u003e specifically assess personal data, privileged access, conflicting roles, and time limits.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprove before technical action:\u003c\/strong\u003e have the manager and system owner authorize according to your internal routine, and escalate high-risk access if necessary.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarry out technical provisioning:\u003c\/strong\u003e authorized IT personnel modify accounts in the respective systems and document the execution.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVerify access:\u003c\/strong\u003e check actual access against the decision. Record the verification date and a secure reference without passwords or tokens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFollow up:\u003c\/strong\u003e review open actions, any exceptions, and the need for reassessment in case of role changes or later termination.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-juridik\"\u003eGDPR, access management, and cybersecurity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the ordering and approval process itself, read our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/foretag\/it-onboarding-behorighetsbestallning-godkannande-checklista-2026\"\u003eguide to IT onboarding and access requests 2026\u003c\/a\u003e. The guide explains least privilege, system owner approval, MFA, and how provisioning is verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection (IMY) guidelines emphasize that the assignment of access rights should be based on a \u003cstrong\u003eneeds and risk analysis\u003c\/strong\u003e, that each individual should normally have unique access, and that permissions should be limited to what is necessary. Organizations also need procedures for assignment, modification, revocation, and follow-up, as well as separation of duties between the requester, approver, and technical implementer where possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen processing personal data, principles such as GDPR requirements for data minimization, legal basis, and appropriate security measures apply. \u003cstrong\u003eThe Cybersecurity Act (2025:1506) entered into force on January 15, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e and may entail specific obligations for covered entities. Not all organizations are subject to the same rules. Specific requirements also apply, for example, to access to patient data in healthcare.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis product is a \u003cstrong\u003egeneral administrative work model\u003c\/strong\u003e. It does not replace sector-specific access assessment, employment contracts, HR onboarding, an IAM system, ISO 27001 audit, or regulatory requirements that may apply to specific operations. Never document passwords, API keys, MFA recovery codes, or unnecessary national identification numbers in Excel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich organizations is this product suitable for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe templates are suitable for small and medium-sized enterprises, IT departments, consultancy firms, associations, property managers, offices, and businesses that have users in Microsoft 365, Google Workspace, ERP, SaaS, VPN, or other systems. They are used as organizational control documentation even when the actual account management takes place in a different tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-faq\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between IT onboarding and IT offboarding?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIT onboarding documents the request, assessment, provisioning, and control of new access rights. IT offboarding handles termination, revocation, and return of equipment when access is no longer needed. They are natural complementary products.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel automatically create accounts or grant permissions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNo. The workbook is a local register, not an integration with an identity or access management system.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many cases and system rights can be registered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e100 cases, 250 separate access records, and 160 actions are pre-prepared in version 1.0.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow are administrator rights and other high-risk roles handled?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRegister the risk level as High and specifically check needs, risk approval, and verification. No high-risk role is automatically suitable for every user.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the template suitable for healthcare?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt can function as a general work reference but does not replace specific rules regarding, for example, access assessment and patient data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a consultant be covered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Needs assessment, relevant contractual relationships, and time limitations should be handled separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre Swedish and English included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The main Swedish templates and the Swedish Excel tool are supplemented by a separate English work reference, adapted to Swedish conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files electronic fillable forms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe PDFs are searchable print and reference versions. Word and Excel are the intended editable formats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-kallor\"\u003eLegal sources and supplementary templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/informationssakerhet\/behorighetsstyrning\/\"\u003eIMY – Access management\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/vanliga-fragor-och-svar\/hur-ska-vi-tanka-kring-behorighetssstyrning-da-personal-slutar\/\"\u003eIMY – Access when staff leave\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/cybersakerhetslag-20251506_sfs-2025-1506\/\"\u003eThe Riksdag – Cybersecurity Act (2025:1506)\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/dataskydd-pa-olika-omraden\/vard\/informationssakerhet--for-vardgivare\/tilldelning-av-behorighet-till-uppgifter-om-patienter--for-vardgivare\/\"\u003eIMY – Specific access assignment in healthcare\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-offboarding-behorighetsavslut-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eIT Offboarding \u0026amp; Access Termination\u003c\/a\u003e – for revocation when needs change or terminate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/utrustningskvittens-inventarieregister-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eEquipment Receipt \u0026amp; Inventory Register\u003c\/a\u003e – separate for physical equipment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDigital delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e ZIP file with 13 delivery documents. No physical goods are shipped. In case of doubt regarding legal applicability, sensitive systems, or high-risk access, a responsible specialist should be involved.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55682151481686,"sku":"IT-ONBOARDING-BEHORIGHET-2027","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/it-onboarding-behorighetsbestallning-2027-hero.png?v=1791628555"},{"product_id":"behorighetsrevision-atkomstgranskning-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf","title":"Access Review \u0026 Permission Audit 2026\/2027 – Excel, Word \u0026 PDF","description":"\u003csection class=\"mb-product-content\" lang=\"en\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAccess Audit \u0026amp; Periodic Access Review 2026\/2027\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional template package for system owners, IT departments, information security officers, and small businesses that want to regularly verify that existing IT access rights are still justified. The package combines an \u003cstrong\u003eExcel-based access register with a dashboard\u003c\/strong\u003e, audit logs, a role and access matrix, an action plan, a documented audit procedure (SOP), a separate user guide, and an English working reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cnav aria-label=\"About the document template\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAbout the document template:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"#mb-contents\"\u003eWhat’s included\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-excel\"\u003eExcel\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-steps\"\u003eStep by step\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-law\"\u003eRules and limitations\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-faq\"\u003eFAQ\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-sources\"\u003eOfficial sources\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/nav\u003e\n\u003caside style=\"background:#E9F4ED;border-left:4px solid #22784A;padding:16px;border-radius:7px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSource and technically verified: October 12, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e Version 1.0 for 2026\/2027. The date refers to the review of the templates and their technical functions, not individual legal certification. The product is an administrative documentation aid, not an integrated IAM solution or a guarantee of regulatory compliance.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-contents\"\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDelivery\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eContent\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAccess register \u0026amp; dashboard\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSeven worksheets with 200 access entries, 200 audit lines, 160 actions, 100 role matrix lines, instructions, and a separate dummy example.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExcel (XLSX)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAudit log\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eScope, access checks, deviations, risk assessment, system owner decisions, and signing.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRole and access matrix\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDefinition of job roles, expected minimum access, system owners, privileges, and segregation of duties.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAction and follow-up\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDocumentation of confirmed deviations, action owners, deadlines, actual changes, and technical verification.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAccess Audit – SOP\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal procedure for risk-based audit frequency, evidence collection, decision-making, and follow-up.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDetailed user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStep-by-step instructions, field explanations, common mistakes, data protection, archiving, risks, and primary sources.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAccess Recertification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEnglish working reference for audits and decision-making, intended for use in Swedish operations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal of 13 files:\u003c\/strong\u003e six DOCX, six searchable A4-PDFs, and one XLSX. The ZIP package contains only delivery files – no scripts, screenshots, or QA files.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-excel\"\u003eThe Excel tool: access rights, audits, and actions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOverview:\u003c\/strong\u003e number of access rights, high-risk items, unreviewed rights, overdue checks, open and overdue actions, and registered audit decisions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAccess rights:\u003c\/strong\u003e account\/access reference, system, owner, actual access, risk level, needs assessment, next internal audit, and duplicate checking of access IDs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAudits:\u003c\/strong\u003e document decisions to \u003cem\u003eKeep, Restrict, Revoke, or Investigate\u003c\/em\u003e, decision-maker, risk, evidence, and follow-up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eActions:\u003c\/strong\u003e link actions to access IDs, set responsibility, deadline, implementation, and verification. Status distinguishes between open, overdue, and verified as closed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRole matrix:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 prepared rows for desired role-based access and responsible system owners.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInstructions and examples:\u003c\/strong\u003e user support within the workbook itself as well as separate dummy examples that do not affect the live register.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Excel does not fetch access rights from Microsoft 365, Entra ID, Google Workspace, VPN, or other systems. The dashboard is based solely on registered values. Technical changes should only be marked as verified after a qualified person has checked the actual system state. No email, SMS, automatic account blocking, or automatic access revocation is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-steps\"\u003eHow to use the access audit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDetermine which systems, account types, and business areas are included. Appoint system owners, technical executors, and auditors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRetrieve a current and dated list of assigned rights from the respective system. Save the supporting documentation securely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRegister access rights in Excel and compare them with the role matrix, active employment\/assignments, business requirements, and any specific risks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSpecially audit privileged accounts, shared technical accounts, external access, and time-limited rights.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMake and document authorized decisions: keep, restrict, revoke, or investigate. An empty decision is not an approval.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCreate an action ticket when rights need to be changed. Appoint a responsible person and set an internal deadline.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVerify the actual system change with relevant documentation and decide on closure. Plan the next risk-based audit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is this package for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is suitable for small and medium-sized enterprises, IT\/HR managers, system owners, information security functions, associations, and organizations with multiple SaaS systems, cloud services, and internal accounts. It is particularly useful for organizations that already have onboarding and offboarding procedures but lack an independent, documented periodic check of existing access rights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-law\"\u003eGDPR, information security, and legal limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection (IMY) guidelines on access control explain that organizations need to limit access based on need, document needs and risk analyses, and regularly follow up on user access rights. When processing personal data, for instance, the basic principles of GDPR and Article 32 on appropriate security can be relevant. For healthcare providers and other specifically regulated operations, additional obligations may apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003caside style=\"background:#FFF4D9;border-left:4px solid #C39335;padding:16px;border-radius:7px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNo universal statutory audit frequency:\u003c\/strong\u003e The template does not dictate that all access rights must be audited every month, quarter, or year. Frequency and scope must be determined based on risk assessment, current sector requirements, agreements, and the organization's security management. The template does not replace audits according to ISO 27001, NIS2\/the Cybersecurity Act's applicable rules, or technical controls in an IAM system.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAccess and account registers can themselves be sensitive. Avoid passwords, API keys, personal identification numbers, and authentication secrets in the files. Store them under access control and apply relevant internal retention policies. For sensitive healthcare systems, security-sensitive operations, or complex personal data issues, a specialist should be consulted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-faq\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference from IT onboarding and IT offboarding?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIT onboarding documents new assignments, and IT offboarding documents the termination of access. Access auditing reviews whether already assigned rights are still needed and correct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use Excel as an access matrix?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A separate role matrix makes it possible to document expected rights, but it does not contain an automatic technical comparison against the systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many entries can it fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e200 access entries, 200 audits, 160 actions, and 100 role matrix entries are prepared in version 1.0.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Excel automatically close unnecessary accounts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Revocation must be performed by an authorized person in the actual system and then verified separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo access rights have to be audited every quarter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no universal rule for all organizations and systems. Decide on intervals based on risk and check specific obligations for your operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the template meet GDPR, NIS2, or ISO 27001?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not in itself. The documents can support broader security work but are not a certification or a complete solution for regulatory compliance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat languages and formats are included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish main templates and Excel, as well as an English working reference for Swedish conditions. The Word files are editable, and the PDF files are searchable print\/reference versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-sources\"\u003eOfficial sources and related templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/informationssakerhet\/behorighetsstyrning\/\"\u003eIMY – Access control\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/dataskydd-pa-olika-omraden\/vard\/informationssakerhet--for-vardgivare\/tilldelning-av-behorighet-till-uppgifter-om-patienter--for-vardgivare\/\"\u003eIMY – Access assignment and follow-up in healthcare\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-onboarding-behorighetsbestallning-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eIT Onboarding \u0026amp; Access Requests\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-offboarding-behorighetsavslut-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eIT Offboarding \u0026amp; Access Termination\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital ZIP download after the file has been processed in the store's Digital Products delivery app. No physical items. Source and technically verified October 12, 2026; no individual legal advice is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"mb-product-related-guide\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePractical guidance:\u003c\/strong\u003e Read our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/foretag\/behorighetsgranskning-atkomstgranskning-checklista\"\u003eguide to access audits, access control, and follow-up with a checklist\u003c\/a\u003e for an overview of the workflow before using the templates.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55710415225174,"sku":"BEHORIGHETSREVISION-2027","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/behorighetsrevision-atkomstgranskning-2027-hero.png?v=1791784777"},{"product_id":"licensregister-saas-kostnadsuppfoljning-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf","title":"License Register \u0026 SaaS Cost Tracking 2026\/2027 – Excel, Word \u0026 PDF","description":"\u003csection class=\"mb-product-content\" lang=\"en\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLicense Register \u0026amp; SaaS Cost Tracking 2026\/2027\u003c\/strong\u003e is a digital template package for Swedish companies, associations, and organizations that need control over software licenses, subscriptions, user seats, recurring costs, and contract renewals. The package combines an \u003cstrong\u003eExcel tool with a cost dashboard\u003c\/strong\u003e, an inventory protocol, a separate document for renewal and cancellation decisions, an internal SaaS routine (SOP), a detailed Swedish user guide, and an English working reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cnav aria-label=\"About the document template\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAbout the document template:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"#mb-innehall\"\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-excel\"\u003eExcel and formulas\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-steg\"\u003eHow to use the package\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-risk\"\u003eAgreements and risks\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-faq\"\u003eFAQ\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-kallor\"\u003eSources\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/nav\u003e\n\u003caside style=\"background:#E7F3EC;border-left:4px solid #267549;border-radius:7px;padding:16px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSource and technically reviewed: October 12, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e Version 1.0 for 2026\/2027. The review concerns the design of the templates, control logic, and indicated regulatory guidance. The tool is not a legally certified contract analysis, an accounting system, or an automated license management service.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-innehall\"\u003eWhat's included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eWhat it contains\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLicense Register \u0026amp; SaaS Cost Overview\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExcel with seven sheets: Overview, Subscriptions, User Seats, Actions, Checklist, Instruction, and Examples. Register for 100 agreements, 150 user seat rows, and 100 actions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExcel (XLSX)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLicense Inventory \u0026amp; Control Protocol\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompile license ID, provider, responsible person, inventory period, cost basis, and control decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRenewal Decisions \u0026amp; Cancellation Control\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCheck actual renewal date, agreed notice period, contract reference, internal approval, and written supplier confirmation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSaaS License Management – Internal SOP\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEditable routine covering purpose, division of responsibilities, ongoing control, decisions, data protection, and documentation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDetailed User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInstructions, calculation examples, error sources, notice periods, user seats, GDPR, and archiving.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish working reference\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEnglish control form and working reference for Swedish companies and SaaS agreements.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal 11 files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 editable DOCX, 5 searchable A4 PDF files, and 1 XLSX. The files are delivered in a ZIP file. The Excel workbook is macro-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-excel\"\u003eExcel for SaaS costs, license seats, and renewal monitoring\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel register and dashboard provide a consolidated overview of \u003cstrong\u003erecurring software costs\u003c\/strong\u003e. Each subscription is registered with a unique license ID, software name, provider, responsible person, number of seats, price per seat, any fixed fee, billing interval, contract renewal date, notice period, and contract status.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOverview:\u003c\/strong\u003e registered and active agreements, normalized annual run rate and monthly equivalent in SEK excluding VAT, upcoming internal monitoring, passed checkpoints, and open actions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSubscriptions:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 register rows with automatic formulas for periodic cost, annual run rate, and monthly equivalent, as well as an internal control signal for renewal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUser Seats:\u003c\/strong\u003e up to 150 aggregated license rows with calculations of available seats and utilization rate, as well as a signal for potential over-allocation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eActions:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 rows for planned cancellation, renegotiation, seat reduction, and follow-up, with internal deadline and evidence reference.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChecklist:\u003c\/strong\u003e pre-filled routine checks for price, invoice, termination terms, security, and documentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInstruction and Examples:\u003c\/strong\u003e easy-to-read guidance and separate fictitious calculation examples that do not affect the real dashboard.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow are costs calculated?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePeriodic cost\u003c\/strong\u003e = number of seats × price per seat + fixed periodic fee. For monthly billing, the periodic cost is multiplied by 12 for a normalized annual rate; for quarterly, by 4; and for annual, by 1. The normalized monthly cost is the annual rate divided by 12. All calculation fields are based on \u003cstrong\u003eSEK excluding VAT\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExample: 8 license seats at 120 SEK each and a fixed fee of 90 SEK per month result in 1,050 SEK per month and 12,600 SEK in normalized annual rate. This is a \u003cstrong\u003ebudget estimate\u003c\/strong\u003e, not an accounting-based accrual or a forecast of changing prices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003caside style=\"background:#FFF3D8;border-left:4px solid #C18B2A;border-radius:6px;padding:15px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant limitation:\u003c\/strong\u003e Excel does not automatically convert foreign currency to SEK and does not generally handle volume discounts, minimum commitments, multi-year agreements, VAT, or automatic price increases. All costs must first be converted and manually verified against agreements and invoices.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-steg\"\u003eHow to use the license register – step by step\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e collect license agreements, invoices, order confirmations, user counts, and contact details for each provider.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRegister:\u003c\/strong\u003e create a unique license ID per agreement and fill in costs in SEK excluding VAT as well as the correct billing interval.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCheck contract terms:\u003c\/strong\u003e verify actual renewal date, auto-renewal, notice period, and any formal requirements in the supplier's own documents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFollow up seats:\u003c\/strong\u003e compare licensed and assigned seats and investigate potentially unused licenses.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecide:\u003c\/strong\u003e document whether the agreement should be kept, renegotiated, reduced, or terminated.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExecute:\u003c\/strong\u003e communicate with the provider according to the agreement, save evidence of cancellation or change, and request confirmation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonitor:\u003c\/strong\u003e regularly review the dashboard, invoices, open actions, and any access or data export questions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-risk\"\u003eRenewal deadlines, GDPR, and legal limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA supplier may require that cancellation be submitted in a specific way and at a specific time. Therefore, Excel only shows an \u003cstrong\u003einternal control deadline\u003c\/strong\u003e when the user enters the renewal date and notice period in calendar days. For contract terms expressed in calendar months, specific contract periods, receipt requirements, or other formal conditions, dates and handling must be assessed separately. The status in Excel is never proof that an agreement has been legally terminated or expired.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf a cloud service provider processes personal data for the organization, a \u003cstrong\u003eData Processing Agreement (DPA) under Article 28 of the GDPR\u003c\/strong\u003e may be required. The Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection (IMY) states that the agreement must regulate the processing and the obligations of the controllers and processors. The template contains an administrative checkpoint for this – not an automatic legal assessment. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/personuppgiftsansvariga-och-personuppgiftsbitraden\/personuppgiftsbitradesavtal\/\"\u003eRead IMY's guidance\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAvoid passwords, personal identity numbers, API keys, and sensitive system information in Excel. The workbook is not encrypted by the template store and has no connections to Microsoft 365, Google Workspace, payment accounts, or accounting systems. No email, push, or SMS reminders are sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is this product for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSmall and medium-sized enterprises, IT managers, financial managers, procurement officers, consulting firms, agencies, digital e-commerce businesses, associations, and organizations with many recurring software services that need to simplify their internal control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-faq\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this a license management system that detects installed software?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. All entries are registered manually in Excel. The product contains no integrations or automatic technical license checks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many subscriptions can be registered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e100 agreement rows, 150 entries for user seats, and 100 action rows are prepared in version 1.0.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel show my annual SaaS cost?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It normalizes stated monthly, quarterly, and annual costs to an annual rate in SEK excluding VAT. It does not calculate booked cost or VAT accounting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the tool calculate the last cancellation date automatically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn internal control deadline is calculated based on entered calendar days. It is not a guarantee of a legally correct notice period. Original agreements and any cancellation confirmation must always be checked.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre automatic reminders sent when a subscription is about to renew?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel displays control signals when the workbook is opened and its formulas are calculated. No automatic communication is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I compare license seats and actual usage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, at an aggregated level if you fill in the current number of seats yourself. The model does not fetch user statistics from suppliers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a template for terminating a SaaS agreement included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA decision and cancellation control document is included, but it is not a universal supplier-specific cancellation notice. Check the agreement's prescribed form.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre there Swedish and English versions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMain documents and Excel are in Swedish. A separate English working reference for Swedish conditions is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-kallor\"\u003eSources and supplementary documents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/personuppgiftsansvariga-och-personuppgiftsbitraden\/personuppgiftsbitradesavtal\/\"\u003eIMY – Data Processing Agreement and Article 28 GDPR\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/avtalsregister-avtalsbevakning-2026-2027-excel-dashboard-word-pdf\"\u003eContract Register \u0026amp; Contract Monitoring\u003c\/a\u003e – for a broader contract overview.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-offboarding-behorighetsavslut-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eIT Offboarding \u0026amp; Access Revocation\u003c\/a\u003e – for actual system and account closure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/utrustningskvittens-inventarieregister-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eEquipment Receipt \u0026amp; Inventory Register\u003c\/a\u003e – for physical work equipment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e downloadable ZIP with Word, PDF, and Excel files. No physical product is sent. Use a specialist for significant contract disputes, license audits, or specific data protection requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55710509203798,"sku":"LICENSREGISTER-SAAS-2027","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/licensregister-saas-kostnadsuppfoljning-2027-hero.png?v=1791785944"},{"product_id":"systemforvaltningsplan-it-systemregister-2026-2027-systemagare-risker-arshjul-svenska-english-word-pdf-excel","title":"System Management Plan \u0026 IT System Register 2026\/2027 – System Owners, Risks \u0026 Annual Cycle | Swedish + English Word\/PDF\/Excel","description":"\u003csection class=\"mb-product-description\" lang=\"sv\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSystem Management Plan \u0026amp; IT System Register 2026\/2027 – Word, PDF and Excel\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConsolidate your company's \u003cstrong\u003eIT systems, system owners, management activities, vendors, and planned actions\u003c\/strong\u003e in a professional and editable document package. You will receive a Swedish system management plan, responsibility matrix, checklists for change and decommissioning, vendor monitoring, an English working template, and a detailed user guide. The Excel tool complements this with a shared overview and register that facilitate practical management.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package is designed for Swedish companies, non-profit organizations, and administrative IT functions that need documented allocation of responsibility and planning without building all the working documents from scratch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e Word (DOCX) + searchable PDF + Excel (XLSX). \u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish + English working document and English quick guide. \u003cstrong\u003ePrice:\u003c\/strong\u003e SEK 79.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cnav aria-label=\"About the document template\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAbout the document template:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"#mb-files\"\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-excel\"\u003eThe Excel tool\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-steps\"\u003eHow to use the package\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-law\"\u003eLegal limitations\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"#mb-faq\"\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/nav\u003e\n\u003caside style=\"background:#EAF6EF;border-left:4px solid #35785A;padding:15px;margin:15px 0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSource-controlled: October 13, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e The content has been cross-checked against public Swedish guidance on information security, continuity, and IT management. It is not a certificate of external legal review, technical certification, or regulatory approval. Any obligations under GDPR, cybersecurity regulations, or sector-specific requirements must be assessed separately.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-files\"\u003eWhat's included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003ePractical function\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSystem Management Plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGoals, scope, roles, agreements, system dependencies, budget, activities, risks, decision mandate, and approval.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eResponsibility matrix \u0026amp; decision process\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRACI for system owners, business, IT, and vendors, plus decision and escalation log.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSystem change \u0026amp; decommissioning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eChange request, deployment checklist, data management, migration, information preservation, and final check.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eVendor and operations monitoring\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFollow-up meeting for service, SLA, incidents, costs, and improvement decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIT System Management Plan – English\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEnglish working document for businesses in Sweden with international teams.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUser guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDetailed Swedish guidance with step-by-step instructions, legal limitations, and an English quick guide.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIT system register \u0026amp; management\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExcel workbook with eight sheets, formulas, data validation, risk scores, and dashboard.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal of 13 files in ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 Word, 6 searchable PDFs, and 1 Excel. Word files can be edited directly. Excel contains working calculations and useful registers – not just empty sheets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-excel\"\u003eWhat can the IT system register in Excel do?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e overview of active systems, missing owners, overdue system reviews, open actions, high risk indicators, and planned system costs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSystem register:\u003c\/strong\u003e space for 85 systems with unique ID, business process, system owner, IT owner, status, criticality, contract end date, and next review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eManagement plan:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 planned activities with owner, cost, timeframe, and status, plus time-based overdue flag.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eActions:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 items with decisions, owners, deadlines, and overdue date checks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRisks:\u003c\/strong\u003e 75 risk items with simple score calculation (probability × consequence) and color-coded risk indicator.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVendors:\u003c\/strong\u003e 65 items with contact role, contract reference, contract date, SLA responsibility, and follow-up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnnual calendar:\u003c\/strong\u003e 80 checkpoints for upgrades, access reviews, follow-up, and testing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInstructions:\u003c\/strong\u003e separate sheet with fill-in guide, workflow, and references.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003caside style=\"background:#FFF2D6;padding:14px;margin:15px 0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant limitation:\u003c\/strong\u003e The risk score is a simplified prioritization aid, not a formal information classification or complete risk analysis. The Excel tool does not automatically audit IT security, contracts, GDPR, or NIS2. Overdue flags depend on registered dates and status. Do not enter passwords, secret keys, or unnecessary personal data.\u003c\/aside\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-steps\"\u003eHow to use the management package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory the systems:\u003c\/strong\u003e collect system names, area of use, system ID, owners, and critical integrations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCreate the system register:\u003c\/strong\u003e fill in the Excel file and link relevant vendor IDs, decision-making materials, and the next review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstablish responsibility:\u003c\/strong\u003e use the RACI matrix and decide who owns the system, operations, security work, contracts, and priorities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDesign the plan:\u003c\/strong\u003e customize goals, service, budget, risks, change work, and follow-up in Word.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan checks:\u003c\/strong\u003e enter activities, risk measures, and checkpoints in the Excel tool's annual calendar.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFollow up:\u003c\/strong\u003e review the dashboard, document vendor follow-up, and decide on actions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUpdate and archive:\u003c\/strong\u003e maintain version history, approve the plan, and revise for major changes or during the annual review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-law\"\u003eSystem management, GDPR, and information security\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA \u003cstrong\u003esystem management plan\u003c\/strong\u003e is an accepted management and working document, but there is no general requirement for a specific template for all Swedish companies. Which legal requirements apply depends on the organization's operations, information, IT dependencies, and applicable regulations. Among other things, GDPR requirements for appropriate technical and organizational security measures (Article 32), processor agreements (Article 28), and records of processing activities (Article 30) may be relevant when personal data is processed. The public sector and certain operations covered by special cybersecurity requirements may have additional obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis template is intended for organized \u003cstrong\u003esystem management, allocation of responsibility, and follow-up\u003c\/strong\u003e. It does not replace a GDPR record of processing activities, impact assessment, security plan, incident routine, technical risk analysis, or a valid vendor agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOfficial and public sources:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.digg.se\/digitala-tjanster\/ramverk-loggning-och-sparbarhet\/lagkrav\/informationssakerhet\"\u003eDigg – information security\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.digg.se\/saker-digital-kommunikation\/sdk-for-accesspunktsoperatorer\/vagledningar-och-rekommendationer\/rekommendation-for-informationssakerhet-och-teknisk-it-sakerhet\"\u003eDigg – risk-based security measures\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/informationssakerhet\/kontinuitetshantering\/\"\u003eIMY – continuity management\u003c\/a\u003e · \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/internt.slu.se\/stod-service\/admin-stod\/it\/it-anskaffning\/stod-och-mallar\/\"\u003eSLU – management plan and decommissioning plan\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"mb-faq\"\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a system management plan?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA plan that describes business goals, roles, budget, responsibility, operations, management activities, risks, follow-up, and decisions for an IT system over a specified period.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo all companies need a system management plan by law?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. There is no general requirement for this specific document with a fixed title. However, certain operations must document relevant parts of security, risk management, and organization according to special regulations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the system register the same as a license register?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. This register focuses on system ownership, governance, lifecycle, risks, and planned follow-up. \u003ca href=\"\/en\/search?q=Licensregister\"\u003eLicense registers and SaaS cost monitoring\u003c\/a\u003e primarily concern licenses, contracts, and subscription costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for ISO 27001 or NIS2?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt can be an administrative aid, but does not contain complete standard requirements or automatic compliance checks. The company must assess any applicable requirements itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre English documents included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, a separate English IT System Management Plan and an English quick guide. The Swedish main templates are not fully translated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need a special program?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Word documents are in DOCX, the PDF versions are readable, and the Excel tool requires Microsoft Excel or a compatible spreadsheet program for formulas and register functions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDigital delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEditable templates for local use. No physical product is shipped. For automatic delivery after purchase, the ZIP file must be verified as linked in Shopify Digital Products, which is checked separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"mb-related-guide\" style=\"padding:16px 20px;margin:20px 0;border:1px solid #dbe6ea;border-radius:10px;background:#f6fafb\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRead our in-depth guide:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/foretag\/systemforvaltningsplan-it-systemregister-systemagare-arshjul\"\u003esystem management plan, IT system register, and system owner responsibility\u003c\/a\u003e – practical working steps, checklist, and frequently asked questions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv data-mb-guide-link=\"systembyte-bokforing-20261024\" style=\"padding:16px 20px;margin:20px 0;border:1px solid #d9e5eb;border-radius:10px;background:#f2f8fa\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre you planning to switch accounting software?\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/foretag\/byta-bokforingsprogram-sie-export-kontroll-arkivering\"\u003eRead the guide on SIE export, balance control, and secure access to older accounting\u003c\/a\u003e. Use the register to document system responsibility, risks, and decommissioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55731990954326,"sku":"SYSTEMFORVALTNING-2027","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/systemforvaltningsplan_2027_hero.png?v=1791908219"},{"product_id":"acceptansprovning-leveransgodkannande-it-2027","title":"Acceptance Testing \u0026 Delivery Approval IT 2026\/2027 – Protocol, Test Plan \u0026 Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcceptance Testing and Delivery Approval for IT Projects – Complete Template Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDo two companies need to document whether an IT delivery meets agreed-upon test and acceptance criteria? This template package helps the client and supplier plan testing, document actual testing, follow up on discrepancies, and make an \u003cstrong\u003eexplicit, traceable decision\u003c\/strong\u003e regarding the delivery. For software, system implementation, integrations, and other defined IT projects in B2B relationships.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Test results, Excel statistics, silence, and completed action fields do not automatically constitute legal delivery approval. This is determined by the actual applicable main agreement and an authorized decision. The package is a documentation and work tool – not a new, independent agreement that unilaterally alters the parties' rights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #0c6380;border-radius:12px;padding:17px 18px;background:#f1f7f8;margin:22px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e01. PACKAGE CONTENTS\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cp\u003e7 Swedish Word\/main and work documents, including one Swedish user guide and one English user guide • 7 corresponding searchable PDF files • 1 functional Excel workbook with nine tabs. \u003cstrong\u003e15 files\u003c\/strong\u003e in ZIP, format DOCX\/PDF\/XLSX, version 2026\/2027. The main templates are in Swedish; only the User Guide is in English. Digital file product, no physical delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #0c6380;border-radius:12px;padding:17px 18px;background:#f1f7f8;margin:22px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e02. WHAT THE FILES CONTAIN\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cp\u003e01 Acceptance protocol and formal decision; 02 Acceptance test plan; 03 Test case protocol; 04 Discrepancies and remaining items (punch list); 05 Action confirmation and retesting; 06 Swedish user guide; 07 English user guide; 08 Excel tool with registers for projects, tests, discrepancies, actions, decisions, and evidence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eContents of the delivery – file by file\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:10px;border-bottom:2px solid #123e59\"\u003eNo. \/ document\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:10px;border-bottom:2px solid #123e59\"\u003ePractical use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003e01. Acceptance protocol\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003eAuthorized delivery decision, clear reservation fields, signing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003e02. Acceptance test plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003eTest environment, accepted criteria, responsibilities, documented plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003e03. Test case protocol\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003eIndividual test cases and verified actual outcomes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003e04. Discrepancies and remaining items\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003eIdentification, prioritization, and follow-up of deficiencies\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003e05. Action confirmation and retesting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003eSeparating claimed rectification from verified results\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003e06. User Guide SV\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step instructions and legal limitations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003e07. User Guide EN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dfe7eb\"\u003eEnglish instructions for Swedish-language documents\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e08. Acceptance register\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eTechnical dashboard, test cases, executions, discrepancies, actions, explicit decisions, and evidence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel tool with nine useful tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDashboard, Project, Test Cases, Executions, Discrepancies, Actions, Decisions, Appendices, and Read Me. Register test cases and actual execution, track discrepancies with reference IDs, and document responsibilities. The dashboard summarizes administrative and technical data but \u003cstrong\u003enever makes decisions regarding legal acceptance or payment rights\u003c\/strong\u003e. Decisions are recorded only after the explicit position taken by an authorized person.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIdentify the main agreement, assignment, delivery, applicable version, and who has the mandate to decide.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRetrieve agreed-upon criteria, deadlines, and any prerequisites for acceptance – do not create new deadlines through assumptions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eComplete the test plan and run the tests; record actual outcomes, times, and evidence in the test case protocol and Excel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRegister deficiencies and remaining items and verify actions through new testing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSelect exactly one explicit decision in the acceptance protocol: approved, not approved, or decision postponed, with reservations and consequences according to the main agreement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eHave authorized persons sign and preserve protocols, appendices, and versioned test documentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal application and important limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe templates are based on Swedish law and two commercial parties. Swedish contract law implies, as a starting point, that the parties' agreement and its terms govern the acceptance procedure. The Sale of Goods Act (1990:931) may be relevant in the purchase of goods but does not automatically apply to a pure assignment to develop software or perform IT services. Consumer contracts are not covered by this product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe protocol alone may not state that payment is due, that all claims for defects expire, that warranties begin to run, or that risk transfers without checking the terms of the main agreement. Lists of discrepancies are documentation of observed conditions, not automatically acknowledged breaches of contract or a new limitation of liability. If the project involves personal data, legal basis, confidentiality, access, data processing agreements if necessary, and test data protection must be assessed separately according to the GDPR.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecifically:\u003c\/strong\u003e large outsourcing agreements, public procurement, international IT agreements, standard contracts, personal data-intensive systems, and ongoing disputes may require an individual legal assessment. The documents provide general support and do not replace legal advice in complex situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated templates and further reading\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the business relationship itself, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/kundavtal-b2b-mallpaket-2026-2027-word-pdf-english-svensk-ratt\"\u003eCustomer Agreement B2B\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/leverantorsavtal-supplier-agreement-2026-2027-word-pdf-english-svensk-ratt\"\u003eSupplier Agreement\u003c\/a\u003e, or \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/ramavtal-mallpaket-2026-2027-word-pdf-svensk-ratt\"\u003eFramework Agreement\u003c\/a\u003e may be relevant. The acceptance package does not replace any of these but is used for delivery testing according to the agreed-upon contract.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs an IT delivery approved when all tests are marked green?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot automatically. Test results serve as a basis for decision-making. Who may approve and what consequences the approval has is determined by the main agreement and applicable law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a delivery be approved with remaining items?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat depends on the main agreement. In that case, document each permitted reservation, the person responsible, any action timeframes, and the explicit approval of the decision-making person.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the templates in both Swedish and English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMain templates, work documents, and registers are in Swedish. A separate English User Guide explains how they are used under Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there a functional Excel register?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The delivered XLSX workbook contains nine tabs, compilations, data fields, and validation; Excel does not replace a legal decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal sources and version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLegal source review October 20, 2026. See the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/lag-1915218-om-avtal-och-andra-rattshandlingar_sfs-1915-218\/\"\u003eContracts Act (1915:218)\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/koplag-1990931_sfs-1990-931\/\"\u003eSale of Goods Act (1990:931)\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/eur-lex.europa.eu\/legal-content\/SV\/TXT\/?uri=CELEX:32016R0679\"\u003eGeneral Data Protection Regulation (EU) 2016\/679\u003c\/a\u003e. Internal AI-assisted source control and document testing have been performed, not external legal review. The version designation 2027 is the name of the edition, not a guarantee regarding future legislative changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55912649490774,"sku":"ACCEPTANS-IT-2027","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/acceptansprovning-it-b2b-2027-huvudbild_b5428a5c-b940-4542-af65-f6c4008116fd.webp?v=1792507918"},{"product_id":"sla-rapport-it-driftuppfoljning-2027","title":"SLA Report \u0026 IT Operations Follow-up 2026\/2027 – Service Levels, Incidents \u0026 Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003csection class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSLA Report and IT Operations Follow-up – B2B Template Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eHow do you demonstrate whether an IT service provider has delivered the service levels agreed upon by the parties? This package—comprising an \u003cstrong\u003eSLA period report, measurement plan, incident log, exemption assessment, and Excel tracking\u003c\/strong\u003e—is intended for the structured documentation of IT service operations and performance between businesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTrack downtime, measurable time, observed availability, and agreed response times. Manage technical deviations and open action items, while keeping \u003cstrong\u003emeasurement, contract interpretation, and decision-making strictly separate\u003c\/strong\u003e. The product complements existing SLA\/service agreements but does not replace them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #187f88;border-radius:12px;background:#edf6f6;padding:18px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e01. PACKAGE CONTENTS\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cp\u003e7 editable Word documents (DOCX), 7 corresponding searchable PDF files in A4 format, and 1 Excel workbook (XLSX) with 9 tabs – \u003cstrong\u003e15 delivery files\u003c\/strong\u003e in a ZIP archive. Five Swedish working documents, a Swedish user guide, and an English User Guide. No full English translation of the main templates is included. Digital delivery, edition 2027.1.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #187f88;border-radius:12px;background:#edf6f6;padding:18px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e02. WHAT THE FILES CONTAIN\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSLA period report and availability analysis\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMeasurement plan and agreed service levels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIncident log and response times\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eExemption assessment and calculation basis\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSLA reconciliation and action plan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eExcel tool with nine tabs and technical formulas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAll documents and file formats\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;border-bottom:2px solid #12364d;padding:10px\"\u003eFile \/ document\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;border-bottom:2px solid #12364d;padding:10px\"\u003eArea of use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"border-bottom:2px solid #12364d;padding:10px\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003e01. SLA Period Report \u0026amp; Availability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eReporting period, measured operational status, contract-related indicators, and explicit conclusions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDOCX \/ PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003e02. Measurement Plan and Service Levels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eSLA clauses, measurement method, period, time zone, and measurement sources\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDOCX \/ PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003e03. Incident Log and Response Times\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eActual occurrences, timestamps, priority, and response\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDOCX \/ PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003e04. Exemption Assessment and Calculation Basis\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eProposals, documentation, contractual support, and separate authorized assessment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDOCX \/ PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003e05. SLA Reconciliation and Action Plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDisagreements, decisions, tracking, and controlled measures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDOCX \/ PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003e06. Swedish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003ePractical guidance, legal limitations, and sources\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDOCX \/ PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003e07. English User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eEnglish guidance for the Swedish documents\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDOCX \/ PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003e08. Excel Tracking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eDashboard, services, measurement periods, incidents, response times, exemptions, actions, decisions, and Read Me\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #d8e4e9\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel – calculate observed availability and track incidents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNine tabs:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dashboard, Services, Measurement Periods, Incidents, Response Times, Exemptions, Actions, Decisions, and Read Me. This tool includes registers, status selections, audit trails, data validation, and automatic summaries. The formula for technically observed gross availability is \u003cstrong\u003e100 × (measurable time − observed unique unavailability) \/ measurable time\u003c\/strong\u003e. Time is entered in minutes, and the formula leaves the result blank in the case of missing or invalid data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMeasurement requires that overlapping incidents are not double-counted and that measurable time, agreed service windows, and any exemptions are established based on the \u003cstrong\u003eactual SLA agreement\u003c\/strong\u003e. The formulas do not determine breach of contract, compensation, service credits, or the right to terminate. Exemptions can only be marked as approved following a separate, authorized assessment, and the period's gross calculation does not automatically deduct proposed exemptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the SLA reports\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRetrieve the signed master agreement, SLA annexes, amendments, and agreed measurement definitions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDetermine service, agreed measurement period, time zone, and measurement sources in the measurement plan.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMaintain an incident log with actual timestamps and verified sources; distinguish between response time and recovery time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eReview measurable time and actual observed unavailability without double-counting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument proposed exemptions and keep these separate from explicitly decided exemptions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCreate the period report and have authorized parties review open issues and action items.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument decisions with relevant contractual support and preserve the basis with version numbers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal requirements and limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package is an administrative and technical follow-up solution for Swedish B2B relationships. The Contracts Act (1915:218) provides general contract law rules, and Section 36 allows for the adjustment of unfair terms. The template does not prescribe any general statutory SLA levels or automatic legal consequences. The Sale of Goods Act (1990:931) is not a generally applicable law for IT service operations and should only be considered within its actual scope of application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e A technical service disruption, a green or red KPI value, a received report, or a failure to object does not automatically imply approval, breach of contract, final settlement, or the right to financial compensation. Such issues must be assessed based on the contract, authority, and applicable law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncident logs may contain personal data. Assess data minimization, permissions, storage terms, and whether a data processor agreement is needed pursuant to GDPR Article 28. A personal data breach must be handled according to a separate legal process. Regulated entities, services subject to DORA\/NIS2, disputes, international agreements, and complex outsourcing may require individual assessment or specialists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated document templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDo you need to regulate the contractual relationship itself first? See \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/serviceavtal-underhallsavtal-2026-2027-sla-underhallsplan-prisbilaga-guide-word-pdf\"\u003eService Agreement \u0026amp; Maintenance Agreement with SLA\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/systemforvaltningsplan-it-systemregister-2026-2027-systemagare-risker-arshjul-svenska-english-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eSystem Management Plan \u0026amp; IT System Register\u003c\/a\u003e. For delivery approval of an individual system, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/acceptansprovning-leveransgodkannande-it-2027\"\u003eAcceptance Testing \u0026amp; Delivery Approval IT\u003c\/a\u003e. This package serves a different function: periodic follow-up of actually delivered service.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions about SLA tracking\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel automatically determine if the provider has breached the SLA?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel calculates technical metrics and follows up on status. Breaches of contract and legal consequences require contract interpretation and authorized assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does 99.9 percent availability mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a percentage but not a universal legal requirement. Its concrete meaning depends on the measurement period, agreed service windows, exemptions, and how availability is defined in your specific contract.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the package contain a new SLA agreement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a reporting and follow-up product. Use a valid SLA or a separate agreement package to define the obligations themselves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre both Swedish and English templates included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe five main documents are in Swedish. A Swedish and an English user guide are included, each as a DOCX and PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMay we deduct planned maintenance from the calculation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOnly after the applicable contractual definition and accurate time documentation have been established. The files distinguish a proposed exemption entry from an explicitly approved assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOfficial legal sources, source control, and version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInternal AI-assisted legal source review: \u003cstrong\u003eOctober 20, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e. Official sources: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/lag-1915218-om-avtal-och-andra-rattshandlingar_sfs-1915-218\/\"\u003eContracts Act (1915:218)\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/koplag-1990931_sfs-1990-931\/\"\u003eSale of Goods Act (1990:931)\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/eur-lex.europa.eu\/legal-content\/SV\/TXT\/?uri=CELEX:32016R0679\"\u003eGDPR (EU) 2016\/679\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/personuppgiftsincidenter\/\"\u003eIMY's information on personal data breaches\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEdition 2027.1\u003c\/strong\u003e indicates the document version, not that all future legal changes have been verified. The documents' internal source control and functional tests do not constitute an external legal review or a guarantee regarding all possible usage situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55913742139734,"sku":"SLA-RAPPORT-2027","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/sla-rapport-it-drifttillganglighet-2027-huvudbild_ab8818ef-5c45-4c81-a58b-103dc2b16509.webp?v=1792510058"},{"product_id":"saker-dataradering-it-avveckling-raderingsprotokoll-excel","title":"Secure Data Erasure \u0026 IT Asset Disposal 2026\/2027 – Erasure Certificates, Verification \u0026 Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSecure Data Erasure \u0026amp; IT Equipment Decommissioning 2026\/2027\u003c\/strong\u003e is a document package for Swedish companies that need to organize and document the decommissioning of computers, servers, SSD\/HDD drives, USB devices, and other storage media. You receive separate materials to \u003cstrong\u003eidentify media, assess risk, select a method, document the erasure actually performed, review the verification, track the transfer, and make an authorized final decision\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSEK 79 · one-time purchase · digital ZIP.\u003c\/strong\u003e The package contains \u003cstrong\u003e7 editable Word files (DOCX), 7 searchable PDF files, and 1 Excel register (XLSX)\u003c\/strong\u003e with nine tabs, totaling 15 files. No physical shipment or subscription. Product version 1.0, dated October 28, 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNote:\u003c\/strong\u003e The templates are documentation aids, not a program that erases data. A protocol, a completed checklist, or an Excel status \u003cem\u003edoes not in itself prove\u003c\/em\u003e that data has actually been erased. Results must be verifiable using an actual method, log, check, and authorized decision in each individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho can benefit from the templates?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIT managers, small businesses, data protection officers, help desks, equipment managers, and others who need to track devices through reuse, transfer, recycling, or waste management. The package complements IT offboarding and inventory registers but is intended for \u003cstrong\u003ethe planned and actual sanitization process of the data carrier itself\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:1px solid #b7cbda;border-radius:9px;background:#edf5fa;padding:17px 20px;margin:17px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"color:#173b5d;margin:0 0 7px\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eFive Swedish work templates, one Swedish user guide, and a separate English User Guide. All seven are available in both Word (DOCX) and searchable PDF. In addition, there is an Excel workbook with nine tabs. \u003cstrong\u003eTotal of 15 customer files.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:1px solid #b7cbda;border-radius:9px;background:#edf5fa;padding:17px 20px;margin:17px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"color:#173b5d;margin:0 0 7px\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eFields for asset ID, storage media ID, owner, data classification, retention requirements, method principle, tool version, log reference, verification result, residual risk, recipient acknowledgment, and authorized decision. Excel provides administrative status overviews and registers – \u003cstrong\u003eno automatic erasure or security certification.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eComplete Document List\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:10px;border-bottom:2px solid #173b5d\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:10px;border-bottom:2px solid #173b5d\"\u003eContent\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:10px;border-bottom:2px solid #173b5d\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDecommissioning Assignment \u0026amp; Device Inventory\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eDevice ID, media identification, assignment, and retention requirements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRisk Assessment \u0026amp; Method Selection\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eData classification, risk, method principle, and separate approval\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eErasure Protocol \u0026amp; Verification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eActually performed method, log, verification result, and deviation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTransfer \u0026amp; Chain of Custody\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eRecipient, media ID, transport reference, and acknowledgment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFinal Decision \u0026amp; Deviation Remediation\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eManual release decision, residual risk, and follow-up\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eWorkflow, security requirements, sources, and limitations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish work documents\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Erasure Register in Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eNine tabs for assignment, verification, quarantine, and final decision\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #dae5ed\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel Register – Nine Tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOverview, Devices, Risk Control, Erasure Assignment, Verification, Transfer, Deviations, Final Decision, and Read Me.\u003c\/strong\u003e The overview shows the number of registered devices, assignments, failed verifications, open deviations, and manually recorded decisions regarding quarantine or release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is \u003cstrong\u003enot an automated security control system\u003c\/strong\u003e. A \"Release\" status means that the user has manually recorded a decision, not that Excel has validated logs or tested the data carrier. If errors or insufficient documentation are discovered, the matter must be investigated separately. The customer version of the workbook contains no macros, API connections, or test cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Work with Secure Decommissioning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory every data carrier.\u003c\/strong\u003e Enter the device ID, serial number, media type, and internal owner. Check separate drives, other storage media, and relevant copies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssess the information and retention requirements.\u003c\/strong\u003e Ensure that erasure does not violate applicable rules, agreements, archiving requirements, or valid holds. Assess the sensitivity of the information and its intended disposition.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSelect an approved method.\u003c\/strong\u003e Document the technical prerequisites and the selected method principle. Base this on the organization's risk assessment and technical standards appropriate for the specific media.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDocument the actual performance.\u003c\/strong\u003e Record the tool, version, times, operator, scope, and log evidence without entering confidential information into the document.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVerify the result separately.\u003c\/strong\u003e Check that the predetermined criteria are met, which media were covered, and whether residual risk remains. Failed or unverified devices must not be released based solely on the spreadsheet status.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTrack the transfer and waste.\u003c\/strong\u003e Document the individuals and organizations receiving the material, the transport or receipt reference, and relevant documents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eConclude with an authorized decision.\u003c\/strong\u003e Decide on reuse, quarantine, or another disposition, and follow up on open deviations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGDPR, Data Minimization, and Security\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGDPR Article 5\u003c\/strong\u003e includes data minimization and the integrity and confidentiality of personal data, among other things. \u003cstrong\u003eArticle 32\u003c\/strong\u003e requires appropriate technical and organizational security measures based on risk. The Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection (IMY) explicitly cites erasure\/deletion as an example of a technical security measure; no single erasure method is generally prescribed for all organizations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNIST SP 800-88 Rev. 2 – Guidelines for Media Sanitization\u003c\/strong\u003e was published in September 2025 and provides guidance on how a storage media sanitization program can be designed. It is technical guidance and \u003cstrong\u003enot Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. The choice of method and verification must be adapted to the risk, technical implementation, and the information's protection requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eElectronic waste:\u003c\/strong\u003e Waste management, potential producer responsibility, waste classification, and reporting to authorities are assessed separately according to relevant Swedish regulations and the organization's actual role. Excel does not replace necessary waste documentation or reporting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the document package erase data on a computer or hard drive?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package contains administrative templates. The erasure itself requires an actual, technically appropriate, and documented action using a tool or process selected and verified by the organization.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between an erasure protocol and an erasure certificate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe protocol helps you record what was actually done, which method was used, and what verification result was documented. Any certificate from an external provider must be assessed separately based on its actual content, scope, and verification. No ready-made security certification is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it enough to format an SSD?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot necessarily. It depends on the media, how the action is performed, what data is present, and the protection requirements. The current NIST guidance addresses risk-based method selection and control; neither quick formatting nor file deletion should be assumed to be sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIf all checklists are completed, can we resell the computer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot without a separate assessment and authorized decision. Check for actual erasure, remaining storage media, any copies, and agreements or security requirements. A completed Excel register does not prove that all information has been erased.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes GDPR apply to all IT devices?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eGDPR applies when personal data is processed. Other confidential business information may also require secure handling according to agreements or internal rules. The assignment must be assessed based on the actual data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all work templates available in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Five work templates and the Swedish user guide are in Swedish. A separate \u003cem\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/em\u003e provides instructions in English. The work templates are not fully translated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat programs do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Word files are DOCX and the Excel register is XLSX. They can be edited in compatible programs. The PDF files are searchable documents for viewing and printing, not fillable e-forms. The ZIP package contains no erasure software.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated Templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor backup and recovery testing: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/backupplan-sakerhetskopiering-aterlasningstest-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eBackup Plan \u0026amp; Recovery Testing\u003c\/a\u003e. For authorization termination: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-offboarding-behorighetsavslut-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eIT Offboarding \u0026amp; Authorization Termination\u003c\/a\u003e. For information classification before risk assessment: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/informationsklassning-informationsinventering-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eInformation Classification \u0026amp; Information Inventory\u003c\/a\u003e. For physical handover: \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/utrustningskvittens-inventarieregister-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eEquipment Acknowledgment \u0026amp; Inventory Register\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOfficial Sources and Review\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSources verified October 28, 2026: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/informationssakerhet\/sakerhetsatgarder\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY – Security Measures\u003c\/a\u003e; \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/csrc.nist.gov\/pubs\/sp\/800\/88\/r2\/final\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eNIST SP 800-88 Rev. 2\u003c\/a\u003e; \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.naturvardsverket.se\/vagledning-och-stod\/producentansvar\/producentansvar-for-elutrustning\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eSwedish Environmental Protection Agency – Producer Responsibility for Electrical Equipment\u003c\/a\u003e. The product's fact-checking is internal and AI-assisted. No external legal, security, environmental, or audit review, nor any official certification, has been performed. The material does not constitute individual advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56369559437654,"sku":"IT-RADERING-UTRANGERING-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_it_dataradering_huvudbild_1600.jpg?v=1793218263"},{"product_id":"it-andringsbegaran-andringsstyrning-word-pdf-excel","title":"IT Change Request \u0026 Change Management – RFC, risk assessment, approval and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Change Request \u0026amp; Change Management\u003c\/strong\u003e is a complete digital template package for businesses and IT organizations that want to manage changes to systems and services in a more structured way. Document \u003cstrong\u003eChange Request (RFC), impact, risk assessment, testing, approval, deployment, rollback plan, and post-implementation review\u003c\/strong\u003e in editable Word files and a trackable Excel register. The package is delivered as a ZIP file with \u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#eef5fc;border:2px solid #245d96;border-radius:9px;padding:17px 19px;margin:17px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;font-size:1.25rem\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eFive Swedish working documents + Swedish and English user guides in both Word and searchable PDF, plus a separate Excel workbook. Total \u003cstrong\u003e7 DOCX, 7 PDF, and 1 XLSX (15 files)\u003c\/strong\u003e. The working files are in Swedish; the English User Guide provides instructions in English. Delivery: digital ZIP for download after purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#eef5fc;border:2px solid #245d96;border-radius:9px;padding:17px 19px;margin:17px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;font-size:1.25rem\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eChange request with acceptance criteria, impact and security assessment, traceable decision-making documentation, testing and go\/no-go, rollback plan, and verified post-implementation review. The Excel workbook has \u003cstrong\u003enine tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e with registers, risk scores, status selections, a decision log, and an overview. It distinguishes between requested, approved, implemented, and actually verified changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is a Change Request (RFC)?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA Request for Change documents what needs to be changed in an IT system, why, which dependencies are affected, and what decision is required before work begins. Structured change management aims to reduce unnecessary operational disruptions and create traceability around responsibility, testing, decisions, and rollback. The package is a practical aid, not a technical system that implements or approves changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Word and PDF Documents\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"background:#dceaf8;padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eNo.\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"background:#dceaf8;padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"background:#dceaf8;padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"background:#dceaf8;padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e01\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChange Request (RFC)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eRegistration, system, change class, purpose, scope, and acceptance criteria.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e02\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImpact Analysis \u0026amp; Risk Assessment\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eBusiness and system impact, data protection, security, risks, and action owners.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e03\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eApproval \u0026amp; Change Decision\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eDecision documentation, testing and rollback controls, mandate, and conditions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e04\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTesting, Deployment \u0026amp; Rollback\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eTest case, go\/no-go, implementation, monitoring, and rollback criteria.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e05\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePost-Implementation Review \u0026amp; Issue Closure (PIR)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eVerification, outstanding points, evidence, and final decision on closure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e06\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eWorkflow, roles, methodology explanations, legal boundaries, and file instructions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e07\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish working documents, not a full translation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d8e5f2;padding:9px\"\u003eWord (DOCX) + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel Tool with Nine Tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe workbook contains \u003cstrong\u003eOverview, Changes, Risks, Tests, Approvals, Deployment, Rollback, Post-Implementation Review, and Read Me\u003c\/strong\u003e. The register tabs are linked by their own change IDs. Risk scores can be calculated as probability multiplied by impact on an internal 1–5 scale when both values are specified. The dashboard only counts registered IDs, not empty preformatted rows. The user must assess the status and final approvals themselves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRegister a request and a unique change ID.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDescribe the current and desired state, dependencies, and acceptance criteria.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAssess risks, operational impact, information security, and any personal data flow.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePrepare testing, communication, and a rollback plan.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument the decision by a person with actual authority according to the organization's procedures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eImplement and log only the approved change.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCheck the outcome, address outstanding points, and document the issue closure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen Is This Package Suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor planned system updates, configuration changes, deployment, and follow-up on changes in services or IT environments. It complements a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/backupplan-sakerhetskopiering-aterlasningstest-word-pdf-excel\"\u003ebackup and restore testing template\u003c\/a\u003e, but does not replace technical testing, incident plans, or an actual system management solution. The forms are not contractual changes between parties, nor are they templates for statutory reporting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat do RFC and CAB mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRFC stands for Request for Change – a change request. CAB (Change Advisory Board) is one possible organizational form for reviewing certain changes. Who actually has decision-making authority depends on the organization's own rules and any agreements, not the template itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the package be used for urgent IT changes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, with a locally adapted decision-making and documentation process. Urgent does not automatically mean an exemption from security requirements or authorities. Those responsible must determine what applies to a genuine urgent change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Excel register an automatic approval system?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel compiles registered data and can calculate a simple internal risk score. It does not send approvals, control permissions, or verify operational reliability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between implemented and verified?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eImplemented describes that a work step has been completed. Verified means that there is a test result according to a predetermined criterion. Approved and closed require separate decisions according to the business process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files fillable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe PDF files are searchable and can be printed, but do not contain interactive PDF forms. To edit or fill them in, use the Word versions and the Excel register.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the templates meet NIS2, DORA, ISO, or ITIL?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo, no automatic requirement fulfillment or certification is included. Which rules apply depend on the business, sector, agreements, and actual implementation. For example, special regulations on the information security of government agencies may not be assumed to apply to all companies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is included in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn English User Guide in both Word and PDF. The five main Swedish templates are not included translated into English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMethodology Sources, Usage Limitations, and Version\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMethodology basis: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.digg.se\/saker-digital-kommunikation\/sdk-for-accesspunktsoperatorer\/vagledningar-och-rekommendationer\/rekommendation-for-informationssakerhet-och-teknisk-it-sakerhet\"\u003eDigg – recommendations on change management\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.peoplecert.org\/browse-certifications\/it-governance-and-service-management\/ITIL-1\/itil-4-practitioner-change-enablement-3794\"\u003ePeopleCert – ITIL 4 Change Enablement\u003c\/a\u003e. The links refer to methodology principles and do not mean that the respective organization has reviewed or approved the product. Always work with actual security testing, the correct decision mandate, local instructions, and relevant agreements. \u003cstrong\u003eVersion 1.0, October 29, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e AI-assisted methodology review; no external legal review or certification has been performed.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56375623057750,"sku":"IT-CHANGE-RFC-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_IT_andringsstyrning_huvudbild_1600.jpg?v=1793263149"},{"product_id":"it-problemhantering-kanda-fel-kedb-word-pdf-excel","title":"IT Problem Management \u0026 Known Errors (KEDB) – Problem Report, Workaround, and Excel | Word\/PDF\/Excel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Problem Management \u0026amp; Known Error Database (KEDB)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a digital document package for IT operations, service desk, and system administration. Gain structure for recurring incidents, document potential root causes, publish controlled instructions for temporary workarounds, and track permanent actions. You get \u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files\u003c\/strong\u003e in editable Word (DOCX), searchable PDF, and Excel (XLSX). Delivered as a digital ZIP file.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"padding:17px 19px;background:#edf4fb;border:2px solid #245a8f;border-radius:9px;margin:18px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 7px\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eFive Swedish working documents, one Swedish user guide, and one English user guide in both Word and PDF, plus an Excel workbook. Total \u003cstrong\u003e7 DOCX + 7 PDF + 1 XLSX\u003c\/strong\u003e. The working documents are in Swedish; the English User Guide explains them in English but does not include English versions of the main templates. Version 1.0, October 29, 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"padding:17px 19px;background:#edf4fb;border:2px solid #245a8f;border-radius:9px;margin:18px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 7px\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eProblem registration, verifiable cause hypothesis, known error post (Known Error), temporary workaround with risks and validity, permanent action, and impact and closure control. The Excel register has \u003cstrong\u003enine tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e for problems, incident links, hypotheses, known errors, workarounds, actions, and verification. The overview uses unique IDs and separate statuses to avoid confusing a completed action with a verified solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is IT problem management and a KEDB register?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eIT problem management is about finding, documenting, and reducing the causes of one or more incidents. An incident may be restored without the root cause being eliminated. A KEDB register (Known Error Database) collects analyzed problems and documented temporary workarounds so that IT support can handle known symptoms in a controlled manner. The templates are used manually and are not an automated ITSM platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat do you get in the package?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#deebf8\"\u003eNo.\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#deebf8\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#deebf8\"\u003eContent\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#deebf8\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProblem Report \/ Problem Registration\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eProblem ID, link to incidents, symptoms, consequences, priority, and plan.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRoot Cause Analysis and Hypothesis Testing\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eHypotheses, supporting and contradicting evidence, controlled tests, and decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKnown Error – KEDB Entry\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eKnown error ID, symptoms, cause basis, target audience, status, and review.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTemporary Workaround\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003ePrerequisites, approval, steps, risks, stop signals, and validity.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePermanent Solution and Post-Implementation Review\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eChange reference, acceptance criteria, verified outcomes, and formal closure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eWorkflow, concepts, risk boundaries, and links to methodology sources.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish working documents.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eExcel Register \/ KEDB\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eNine tabs: overview, problems, incident links, hypotheses, known errors, workarounds, actions, verification, and Read Me.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #cddfed\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Excel Tool – Document, Track, and Maintain Control\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe overview distinguishes between registered problems, open and ongoing investigations, active known errors, approved workarounds, completed actions, verified solutions, and formally closed cases. Rows without a registered ID should not be counted. The workbook contains pre-formatted register rows and status lists. \u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e status fields and formulas cannot determine on their own whether risks are acceptable, causes are substantiated, or a case may be closed. Check the recalculation of the formulas in your spreadsheet application after entering data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Template Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRegister a unique Problem ID and link related incidents without unnecessary personal data.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDescribe observed symptoms and actual business impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTest alternative cause hypotheses with reliable and approved tests.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument a known error when the investigation basis justifies it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDescribe any temporary workaround with its risk, authorization, and validity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eManage permanent correction through the organization's regular change process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVerify the result and have an authorized decision-maker document closure or continued monitoring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eDifference from Other Templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTo implement a concrete change with authorization, testing, and rollback, you can use \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-andringsbegaran-andringsstyrning-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eIT Change Request \u0026amp; Change Management\u003c\/a\u003e. For a broader method for quality investigation, there is \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/8d-rapport-rotorsaksanalys-5-varfor-mall-2026-2027\"\u003e8D Report \u0026amp; Root Cause Analysis\u003c\/a\u003e. This package is more specific to the IT problem lifecycle and knowledge articles about known errors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does KEDB mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eKEDB stands for Known Error Database, a register of documented known errors with symptoms, conditions, temporary workarounds, and references to actions. The product's Excel workbook is a simple register, not a complete ITSM application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between an incident and a problem?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIncident management often focuses on quickly restoring a service. Problem management focuses on underlying causes and reducing the risk of the same incident recurring. A restored incident therefore does not automatically mean the problem has been addressed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a workaround?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA temporary solution that limits impact but does not necessarily address the root cause. It should have clear prerequisites, an owner, risk control, validity, and regular review.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the template an ITIL-certified solution?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The templates are independently designed working tools with methodological support from publicly available ITIL-related guidance. They have not been reviewed or certified by PeopleCert.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Excel automatically handle approval and case closure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel has summaries and status fields but does not perform a technical check of a change. Actual verification and decisions on closure must be made according to the organization's authorization order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files interactive forms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. They are searchable and printable. Use the Word files for editing and Excel for register management.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the package replace statutory incident reporting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Organizations with special requirements under, for example, cybersecurity legislation or other sector regulations must follow their own reporting and information security requirements. The templates are voluntary internal working tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSources and Quality\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMethodology sources: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.peoplecert.org\/browse-certifications\/it-governance-and-service-management\/ITIL-1\/itil4-practices-problem-management-3688\"\u003ePeopleCert – ITIL 4 Problem Management\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/support.atlassian.com\/jira-service-management-cloud\/docs\/what-is-the-itil-problem-management-process\/\"\u003eAtlassian – ITIL problem management process\u003c\/a\u003e. The sources do not imply a recommendation or approval of the product. AI-assisted methodology review on October 29, 2026; no external specialist or legal review has been conducted.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56375735157078,"sku":"IT-PROBLEM-KEDB-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_IT_Problemhantering_KEDB_huvudbild_1600.jpg?v=1793264191"},{"product_id":"datamigreringsplan-systembyte-faltmappning-excel","title":"Data Migration Plan \u0026 System Cutover – Field Mapping, Go\/No-Go \u0026 Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eData migration plan and system change – a complete work support in Word, PDF and Excel.\u003c\/strong\u003e For Swedish companies that need to document a planned change of business system, customer register, CRM, member register or other digital system. The package helps with data mapping, field mapping, test runs, reconciliations and a documented decision on deployment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe work material provides structure to the process, but \u003cstrong\u003eis not a technical migration service, security certification, legal certificate or guarantee that data can be restored.\u003c\/strong\u003e A real migration must be performed and tested by appropriately responsible persons with current permissions and security routines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen do you need a data migration plan?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDuring a system change, it is important to know which data sets should be included, how fields and identifiers are mapped, which errors stop the deployment and who makes the decisions. The templates are suitable for internal IT, project managers, data owners and outsourced technical providers who need common documents and traceable decisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #47708B;background:#F2F7FB;padding:17px 20px;margin:20px 0;border-radius:11px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#173A59\"\u003e01. Package contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files in a ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e seven Word files (DOCX), the same seven documents as searchable PDF files and an Excel workbook (XLSX). Five main templates and two guides – Swedish and English. The Swedish main templates are editable; the PDF versions are primarily intended for printing and review and are not guaranteed to be interactively fillable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #47708B;background:#F2F7FB;padding:17px 20px;margin:20px 0;border-radius:11px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#173A59\"\u003e02. What the files contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eMigration plan, data mapping and field mapping, test plan for trial migration, reconciliation protocol for data quality, go\/no-go decision with rollback plan as well as two user guides. The Excel register includes nine tabs for data sets, fields, test results, deviations, runs, decisions and actions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAll files and their function\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"overflow-x:auto\"\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eLanguage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMigration plan \u0026amp; system change\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eScope, responsibility, schedule, boundaries and risk controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eData mapping \u0026amp; field mapping\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eData sets, source\/target fields, transformation rules and controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTest plan \u0026amp; trial migration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected outcomes, trial run, deviations and retesting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eReconciliation protocol \u0026amp; data quality\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eQuantity control, keys, differences and decided tolerance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGo\/No-Go \u0026amp; rollback plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStopping criteria, decision mandate, rollback and follow-up\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUser guide SV\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWork order, practical controls and legal boundaries\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUser Guide EN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish templates\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEnglish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMigration register in Excel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNine tabs with register, status options and dashboard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel register for data migration – nine tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard, Read me, Data sets, Field mapping, Test cases, Deviations, Run log, Decisions and Actions.\u003c\/strong\u003e Use stable DATA-, MAP-, TEST- and RUN-IDs and enter actual information for each migration step. The register tabs have relevant manual status options. The dashboard counts the number of items, test results, open deviations and marked decisions. It does not run technical migrations and does not automatically approve a deployment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the document package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDefine the data boundaries.\u003c\/strong\u003e Identify source systems, target platform, information owners, necessary data types and what should not be transferred.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan and determine responsibility.\u003c\/strong\u003e Specify time window, prerequisites, permissions, backup, restoration test and responsible decision makers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMap fields.\u003c\/strong\u003e Document source fields, target fields, types, data conversions, rules for duplicates and key references.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTest in a test environment.\u003c\/strong\u003e Work with approved test tasks, measure actual deviation and document retesting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecide GO\/NO-GO.\u003c\/strong\u003e Test blocking errors, technical restoration and results before production start.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eReconcile after run.\u003c\/strong\u003e Check items, key values, integrations and logs as well as document actions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eData protection, security and important limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePersonal data:\u003c\/strong\u003e When migrating personal data, principles of purpose limitation, data minimization, accuracy and storage minimization apply. Review which data needs to be transferred at all and how access is protected. Read \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/grundlaggande-principer\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY's guidance on GDPR's basic principles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eData protection and security by design:\u003c\/strong\u003e GDPR articles 25 and 32 may require risk-adapted measures, access control, appropriate tests and measures for confidentiality, integrity and availability. See \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/inbyggt-dataskydd-och-dataskydd-som-standard\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY on data protection by design\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/eur-lex.europa.eu\/legal-content\/SV\/TXT\/HTML\/?uri=CELEX:32016R0679\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eGDPR's full regulation text\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImpact assessment:\u003c\/strong\u003e If the processing of personal data is likely to lead to a high risk, a data protection impact assessment under GDPR article 35 may be required before the processing begins. See \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/vanliga-fragor-och-svar\/kan-en-konsekvensbedomning-goras-efter-att-personuppgiftsbehandlingen-har-paborjats\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY's guidance on the timing of impact assessment\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAgreements and special requirements:\u003c\/strong\u003e Personal data processing agreements, third-country transfers, retention rules, contract terms or public activities may require separate documents and assessments. The document package does not replace these.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions about the templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this a ready-made solution for automatic data migration?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Word and Excel files document planning, controls, decisions and follow-up. They do not move data between systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the templates when changing CRM or financial systems?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, as an administrative basis. Adjust the controls according to data types, integrations, technical architecture, confidentiality and applicable law and contract requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there a plan to revert to the old system included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Go\/No-Go document has a section for rollback plan, stopping criteria and decision mandate. However, a real restoration method must be built and tested separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel show how many test cases have been approved?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The dashboard summarizes manual status markings in the test register. A registered status does not mean that technical tests have actually been performed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use real customer data in the templates?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAvoid raw personal data or sensitive data in work documents unless they are necessary, permitted and properly protected. Primarily use ID, roles and de-identified information for documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all documents in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The main templates and Swedish guide are in Swedish. English User Guide is a separate English-language instruction for the Swedish main templates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the documents GDPR-approved or certified?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. There is no general such product approval. Every organization is responsible for its real system change and its applicable obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated documents for IT and process work\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor defining boundaries, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/processkartlaggning-processbeskrivning-processkarta-raci-excel\"\u003eProcess Mapping \u0026amp; Process Description\u003c\/a\u003e can help. To plan separate backup and restoration test, there is \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/backupplan-sakerhetskopiering-aterlasningstest-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eBackup Plan \u0026amp; Restoration Test\u003c\/a\u003e. For formal IT delivery, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/acceptansprovning-leveransgodkannande-it-2027\"\u003eAcceptance Testing \u0026amp; IT Delivery Approval\u003c\/a\u003e can be used as a complementary basis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFormat, delivery and review\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProduct version 1.0. AI-assisted source control of public data protection sources October 29, 2026. \u003cstrong\u003eNo external legal review, certification or actual system migration has been performed.\u003c\/strong\u003e Document format: 7 DOCX, 7 searchable PDF and 1 XLSX. Digital ZIP is delivered after the store has linked the digital file and activated the product. The product is under preparation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56375735222614,"sku":"DATAMIG-SYSTEMBYTE-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_datamigrering_huvudbild_1600_43d167e2-6b39-46c4-a916-c45b5e3b73f8.png?v=1793264376"},{"product_id":"cmdb-konfigurationsregister-word-pdf-excel","title":"CMDB \u0026 Configuration Management Database – CI Register, System Dependencies, and Excel | Word\/PDF\/Excel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCMDB \u0026amp; Configuration Register\u003c\/strong\u003e is a digital template package for IT system management, IT support, and organizations that need to document configuration items (CIs), their owners, dependencies, change history, and verifications. The package contains \u003cstrong\u003e15 files in Word, searchable PDF, and Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e and is primarily suitable for small and medium-sized register environments where manual documentation support is appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:17px 19px;background:#f1f6fc;border:2px solid #245e98;border-radius:10px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 8px\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e7 editable Word files (DOCX), 7 searchable PDF files, and 1 Excel workbook (XLSX)\u003c\/strong\u003e, delivered in a ZIP file. Five Swedish operational documents, one Swedish user guide, and one English User Guide in Word and PDF. The main templates are in Swedish; the English file is a guide, not full English translations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:17px 19px;background:#f1f6fc;border:2px solid #245e98;border-radius:10px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 8px\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eCI cards for systems and services, a relationship matrix with directional dependencies, a lifecycle and change log, baseline and control protocols, and ownership and register audit. \u003cstrong\u003eThe Excel workbook has nine tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e and an overview that only counts registered IDs. It also checks whether both CIs in a relationship exist in the register and flags self-relationships.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is a CMDB?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA CMDB (Configuration Management Database) is a structured register of configuration items and relationships that helps an organization understand how IT services are built and which components they depend on. A configuration item can, for example, be an application, database, server, or service. This Excel model is a manual register, not a database application, monitoring system, or automated inventory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Documents – File by File\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#e4effa\"\u003eNo.\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#e4effa\"\u003eFile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#e4effa\"\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#e4effa\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCI card and system description\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eUnique CI ID, system class, owner, environment, criticality, version, and control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRelationship matrix and dependencies\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eDirectional relationships between configuration items, owners, and control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCI lifecycle and change log\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eChange references, decisions, implementation, and verification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBaseline and configuration verification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eApproved state, actual control, deviations, and evidence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOwnership and register audit\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eRoles, responsibilities, audit intervals, and quality assurance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eStep-by-step workflow, limitations, security, and methodology sources\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish templates\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eExcel – CMDB configuration register\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eNine tabs with CI register, relationships, baselines, and verifications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d5e1ed;padding:9px\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Excel Register – Nine Worksheets\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOverview, CI Register, Relationships, Owners, Baselines, Changes, Verifications, Deviations, and Read Me.\u003c\/strong\u003e Each configuration item is assigned a unique ID. Relationships are linked to existing CI IDs and checked for missing or invalid endpoints. The overview shows the number of registered items, relationships, baselines, verifications, and deviations. However, an entered status is not evidence of actual technical control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the CMDB Templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDetermine which system, service, and operating environments the register should cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDefine local rules for CI IDs, categories, status, relationships, and responsibilities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRegister items and relevant management tasks in the CI register.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCreate directional dependencies between existing items and check their IDs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument baselines, planned changes, and decisions in the regular change process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVerify actual conditions and register deviations, owners, and follow-up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAudit the register regularly and when significant changes occur.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCMDB or Regular Inventory Register – What Is the Difference?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA traditional inventory register often focuses on assets, quantities, procurement, and financial tracking. The CMDB configuration register, instead, focuses on IT service components, their configuration, ownership, and how they depend on each other. It complements, for example, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-andringsbegaran-andringsstyrning-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eIT Change Request \u0026amp; Change Management\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-problemhantering-kanda-fel-kedb-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eIT Problem Management \u0026amp; Known Errors (KEDB)\u003c\/a\u003e. These two products may still be unpublished; the links are not automatically activated by this draft.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs This a Real Automated CMDB?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo, it is a professional manual document package. The Excel register does not automatically retrieve data from servers, cloud services, or other systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat Is a CI ID?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a unique identifier for a configuration item. The same ID is used in registers, relationships, and control documents so that information can be tracked throughout the item's lifecycle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Excel Check Whether System Dependencies Work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel checks that both specified CI IDs exist in the register and flags certain common registration errors. It does not test whether a technical integration or service works.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the Documents ISO or ITIL Certified?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The product consists of standalone templates with methodology references to ITIL Service Configuration Management and ISO\/IEC 20000-1. No certification, recommendation, or external audit is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow Do I Protect Sensitive System Information?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvoid passwords, private keys, authentication credentials, and unnecessary personal data. Limit access and tailor the level of detail to information classification and the organization's security routines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF Files Fillable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe PDF versions are searchable and intended for viewing and printing. Edit the Word and Excel versions to enter information. Interactive PDF forms are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs There an English Template Version?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn English User Guide is included in Word and PDF. However, the five operational documents are in Swedish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSources and Limitations of Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMethodology basis: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.peoplecert.org\/browse-certifications\/it-governance-and-service-management\/ITIL-1\/itil-4-practitioner-service-configuration-management-3800\"\u003ePeopleCert – ITIL 4 Service Configuration Management\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.fedramp.gov\/2026\/providers\/rev5\/controls\/configuration-management\/\"\u003eNIST\/FedRAMP – system component inventory (CM-08)\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.iso.org\/standard\/70636.html\"\u003eISO\/IEC 20000-1:2018\u003c\/a\u003e. These are references for the design, not approvals of the product. The templates do not replace organization-specific security controls, regulatory requirements, agreements, or ITSM systems. Version 1.0, October 29, 2026. AI-assisted methodology review; no external legal, security, or certification review has been performed.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56375837753686,"sku":"CMDB-KONFIG-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_CMBD_Konfigurationsregister_huvudbild_1600.jpg?v=1793265197"},{"product_id":"releasehantering-driftsattningsplan-gonogo-excel","title":"Release Management and Deployment Plan – Checklist, GO\/NO-GO and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRelease management and deployment plan for IT – a ready-made working document in Word, PDF and Excel.\u003c\/strong\u003e Structure a software release, control dependencies, document GO\/NO-GO decisions, plan rollbacks and follow up on functionality after production deployment. For companies, IT managers, project managers and businesses introducing new system versions or changes to existing services.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTemplates for planning and documentation – not an automated release platform.\u003c\/strong\u003e No scripts deploy systems, approve changes or perform rollbacks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template package suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUse it when a release affects real users, services or integrations and it needs to be clear what needs to be done, who has the mandate, what tests are required, when the work should be stopped and how the status should be handed over to operations. The documentation can complement an existing incident management, DevOps or ITSM process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #416D8B;background:#F0F6FA;border-radius:12px;padding:16px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#163959\"\u003e01. Package contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files in a ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e five separate Swedish working templates, a Swedish user guide and an English User Guide, each in editable Word (DOCX) as well as a corresponding searchable A4 PDF, plus an Excel workbook (XLSX) with nine tabs. The PDF files are not promised as interactive fillable forms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #416D8B;background:#F0F6FA;border-radius:12px;padding:16px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#163959\"\u003e02. What the files contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eRelease plan and deployment window, checklist, rollout and rollback plan, GO\/NO-GO decision protocol, post-check with handover, as well as Swedish and English user guides. The Excel register collects releases, controls, risks, test results, decisions, rollout steps and post-checks in a summary dashboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile by file – concrete use cases\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"overflow-x:auto\"\u003e\u003ctable style=\"border-collapse:collapse;width:100%\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr style=\"background:#e6f0f6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:10px;text-align:left\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:10px;text-align:left\"\u003eFunction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:10px;text-align:left\"\u003eLanguage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:10px;text-align:left\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e01 Release plan \u0026amp; scope\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eRelease ID, version, deployment window, dependencies and responsibilities\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e02 Deployment checklist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eVerification before, during and after implementation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e03 Rollout \u0026amp; rollback plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eImplementation steps, stop rules and technical rollback references\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e04 GO\/NO-GO – Decision protocol\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDocumented start decision, basis and conditions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e05 Post-check \u0026amp; release protocol\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSmoke test, stability check, deviations and operational handover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e06 User guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eStep-by-step filling, controls and limitations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e07 User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eInstructions for the Swedish templates\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e08 Excel register\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eNine tabs with release entries, tests, risks, decisions and dashboard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d4e1ea;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel register with nine tabs and dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard, Read me, Releases, Checklist, Risks, Tests, Decisions, Rollout and Post-check.\u003c\/strong\u003e The register tabs have clear columns for Release ID, responsibility, actual evidence and manual status markings. The dashboard counts registered releases, controls, blockers, open risks, failed tests, GO\/NO-GO decisions, completed rollout steps and deviations after deployment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e marking a status as “Approved” does not mean that Excel has tested the system. Decisions are made by an authorized person and actual evidence needs to exist outside the formulas. The workbook contains no macros and runs no code against the company's IT environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the documents – step by step\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIdentify release and scope.\u003c\/strong\u003e Enter version number, technical and organizational division of responsibility and planned deployment window.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eReview dependencies and risks.\u003c\/strong\u003e Check integrations, permissions, monitoring, backup requirements and technical rollback.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan rollback.\u003c\/strong\u003e Document stop criteria, actual rollback method and who is authorized to decide to abort.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePerform technical tests.\u003c\/strong\u003e Save actual test results, deviations and traceable evidence references.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMake GO\/NO-GO decision.\u003c\/strong\u003e Let an authorized person review the basis and remaining risks before production start.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImplement and follow up.\u003c\/strong\u003e Log rollout steps, smoke test, alerts and post-checks and hand over to the operations manager.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant legal and security limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePersonal data:\u003c\/strong\u003e If the deployed service processes personal data, the data controller needs to assess current purposes, privacy-friendly default settings and technical and organizational security measures. This follows, among other things, from GDPR articles 5, 25 and 32 depending on the processing. Read \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/inbyggt-dataskydd-och-dataskydd-som-standard\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY on data protection by design\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/informationssakerhet\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY on information security\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/introduktion-till-gdpr\/dataskyddsforordningen-i-fulltext\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003ethe full text of the data protection regulation\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRollback:\u003c\/strong\u003e an administrative rollback plan does not prove that the system can be technically restored. There may be a significant risk of data loss or incompatible database versions. Rollback method and business impact should be tested separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eParticularly regulated businesses:\u003c\/strong\u003e businesses covered by sector-specific security, reporting, archiving or contractual requirements need their own control points. The template package is not ISO, ITIL or NIS2 certification, not a complete legal compliance analysis and not a replacement document for any personal data incidents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a deployment plan?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA deployment plan describes how a specific system version or change should be introduced, who does what, what controls are required and how to abort if something goes wrong.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does GO\/NO-GO mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a documented decision to continue or abort a planned deployment. The decision should be based on actual evidence and made by an authorized person.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I perform an automated rollback with the files?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The rollout and rollback template helps you document a method. It does not execute commands, restore data or verify backup automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs an Excel-based release register included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Nine tabs with status fields, references, risk prioritization and dashboard. Formulas summarize the data that the user has registered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I fill in the Word templates myself?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The five main Swedish templates and guides can be edited in a compatible word processor. The PDF versions are searchable reading versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all templates translated into English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The five main templates are Swedish; the separate English User Guide explains how the files are used and does not imply any legal adaptation to another country.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the templates for a SaaS or CRM release?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, as organizational support, but complement with the specific tests, agreements, security routines and preparedness of the technical environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eComplementary documents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/datamigreringsplan-systembyte-faltmappning-excel\"\u003edata migration and system change\u003c\/a\u003e there is separate field mapping and reconciliation (the product is currently under preparation). If the IT delivery is to be approved against requirements, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/acceptansprovning-leveransgodkannande-it-2027\"\u003eAcceptance Testing \u0026amp; IT Delivery Approval\u003c\/a\u003e can complement the workflow. For internal requirements there is also \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/kravspecifikation-affarskrav-kravmatris-acceptanskriterier-excel\"\u003eRequirements Specification \u0026amp; Business Requirements\u003c\/a\u003e (currently draft).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProduct information and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProduct version 1.0, source control 29 October 2026, AI-assisted review of official sources. No external legal review or certification has been performed. Digital delivery with 15 files in ZIP when the seller has linked a digital file to the product and activated it. Product status before manual publication: draft.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56375877992790,"sku":"RELEASE-DRIFT-GONOGO-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_releasehantering_huvudbild_1600_ebda79bc-1d52-4892-b7c8-284371678861.png?v=1793265664"},{"product_id":"it-tjanstekatalog-tjanstebeskrivning-support-excel","title":"IT Service Catalog and Service Description – Support, Ordering, and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Service Catalog and Service Description\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional template package for businesses that want to document their internal IT services, responsible service owners, ordering processes, support levels, and planned decommissioning. The content consists of editable Word documents, searchable PDF files, and an Excel register with nine tabs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChoose the right IT service catalog:\u003c\/strong\u003e This version focuses on support levels, escalation, service requests, and decommissioning. For more detailed catalog management with service cards, service owners, and publication controls, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-tjanstekatalog-tjanstebeskrivning-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eIT Service Catalog with Service Cards\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #315d7d;background:#eef5fa;padding:16px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e15 files: 7 Word (DOCX), 7 searchable PDFs, and 1 Excel (XLSX). Five working documents, one Swedish guide, and one English guide. The PDF files are read-only versions, not interactive forms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #315d7d;background:#eef5fa;padding:16px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eService catalog with service ID, owner, and status; service description with scope and exceptions; support and escalation plan; service request; follow-up and decommissioning protocol; Swedish user guide; English User Guide; and Excel register.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorking Documents\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIT Service Catalog:\u003c\/strong\u003e overview, responsibilities, and approved catalog version.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eService Description:\u003c\/strong\u003e target audience, included features, exceptions, dependencies, and permissions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupport and Escalation:\u003c\/strong\u003e contact channels, opening hours, priorities, and responsibilities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eService Request:\u003c\/strong\u003e request, assessment, decision, and delivery confirmation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eService Follow-up and Decommissioning:\u003c\/strong\u003e change decision, follow-up, data export, and control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGuides:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish instructions and a separate English user guide. The main templates are in Swedish.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eExcel Register with Nine Tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDashboard, Read Me, Services, Responsibilities, Requests, Support, Suppliers, Follow-up, and Decommissioning. The Dashboard shows registered services, active services, open requests, and ongoing decommissioning. Statuses are recorded manually and must be supported by actual decisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Service Catalog\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAppoint a catalog manager and responsible service owners.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAssign each service a unique identification number, for example SVC-001.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDescribe the service's content, limitations, and support channels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument requests and decisions in Word and Excel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eReview status and contract references regularly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMake separate decisions for changes or decommissioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\u003ch2\u003eImportant Information on Legal and Information Security\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe IT service catalog is an administrative work aid and does not replace a binding service agreement, SLA, or data processing agreement. When an external supplier processes personal data on behalf of the business, a data processing agreement may be required under GDPR Article 28. Read more from the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/personuppgiftsansvariga-och-personuppgiftsbitraden\/personuppgiftsbitradesavtal\/\"\u003eSwedish Authority for Privacy Protection\u003c\/a\u003e. Also assess security, confidentiality, and archiving requirements separately. No external legal certifications or certifications are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is an IT service catalog?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA consolidated description of the IT services a business offers internally or externally, for example what is included, who is responsible, and how requests are handled.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a service description the same as an SLA?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The document may describe intended service levels, but a binding SLA requires a separate contractual commitment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel automatically approve a request?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel compiles registered data and status markings. Approval is performed by an authorized person.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the documents in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe main templates are in Swedish. An English user guide is included for support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the templates be used for external cloud services?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, as administrative service descriptions. Separately check relevant supplier agreements, information security, and any data processing agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eDelivery Information\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDigital ZIP with 15 files. Version 1.0. AI-assisted source control 2026-10-29. No external legal review. The ZIP file is linked to Shopify Digital Products and can be downloaded after purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56376160977238,"sku":"IT-TJANSTEKATALOG-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_tjanstekatalog_1600_1ba4adb8-0e69-47fa-bd4c-597751ec105f.png?v=1793267040"},{"product_id":"it-tjanstekatalog-tjanstebeskrivning-word-pdf-excel","title":"IT Service Catalog \u0026 Service Description – Service Cards, Ordering Procedures \u0026 Excel | Word\/PDF\/Excel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Service Catalogue \u0026amp; Service Description\u003c\/strong\u003e is a digital package for structuring the IT services an organization offers, what each service entails, who owns it, and how users access it. With \u003cstrong\u003eWord, searchable PDF, and Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e, you get five Swedish working templates, two user guides, and a register with nine tabs. The package is suitable for internal IT, service desks, system administration, and smaller IT service providers that want to create a clear and maintainable catalogue.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChoose the right IT service catalogue:\u003c\/strong\u003e This package focuses on service cards, service ownership, catalogue publication, and ordering channels. For a more support-oriented package with escalation and support workflows, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-tjanstekatalog-tjanstebeskrivning-support-excel\"\u003eIT Service Catalogue – Support and Ordering\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #245d9b;background:#eef5fc;border-radius:10px;padding:17px 19px;margin:19px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 9px\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e7 DOCX + 7 searchable PDFs + 1 XLSX = 15 customer files.\u003c\/strong\u003e Five Swedish working documents in Word\/PDF, one Swedish user guide and one English User Guide in Word\/PDF, plus an Excel register. Delivered as a ZIP file for digital download after purchase. The English guide is a reference and does not mean that the Swedish main templates are translated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #245d9b;background:#eef5fc;border-radius:10px;padding:17px 19px;margin:19px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 9px\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eService cards with scope, target audience, and ownership functionality; ordering channels and approval; contact and support information; lifecycle review; publication and change control. \u003cstrong\u003eExcel has nine tabs\u003c\/strong\u003e, drop-down lists for status and category, duplicate checks for Service ID, and an overview with eight administrative key metrics that do not count empty register rows.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is an IT service catalogue?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA service catalogue is a structured description of the services that can be used or ordered from an IT function or IT service provider. It specifies, for example, what is included, the target audience, the ordering channel, the service owner, contact channels, and links to existing service levels. This product is \u003cstrong\u003ea documentation and register package\u003c\/strong\u003e, not an operational self-service portal or an automated monitoring solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAll Files in the Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;background:#e5eef9;text-align:left\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;background:#e5eef9;text-align:left\"\u003eWhat it is used for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;background:#e5eef9;text-align:left\"\u003eFile format\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eService card \u0026amp; service description\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eUnique service ID, target audience, included\/not included, ordering channel, and owner\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eOrdering channel \u0026amp; customer information\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eWho can order, via which channel, decision authority, and follow-up\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eOwnership, support \u0026amp; service terms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eService owner, contact channels, support function, existing SLA reference\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eService review \u0026amp; lifecycle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eRecurring review, changed needs, risks, decisions, and responsibilities\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003ePublication control \u0026amp; change log\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eVersion, approval, actual publication date, and post-publication review\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eMethod, examples, Excel instructions, and usage limitations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish working templates\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eIT service catalogue in Excel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003e9 tabs, status selection, ID check, and summary dashboard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d5e2ef;vertical-align:top\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Excel Workbook – Nine Tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOverview, Services, Ordering Channels, Contacts, Service Goals, Dependencies, Review, Changes, and Read Me.\u003c\/strong\u003e The main register has a unique Service ID, name, category, owner, target audience, status, and ordering channel. A quality flag marks duplicate IDs and missing core fields. The overview counts registered, published, planned, and paused services, as well as certain other administrative registrations. \u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e a registered status of “Published” does not mean that a service is actually available; actual agreements, support channels, and publication decisions must be checked separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecide whether the service catalogue should be internal, external, or have different target audiences.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCreate a unique Service ID and appoint an authorized service owner.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDescribe the service's benefits and exactly what is and is not included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCorrectly document the ordering channel, eligibility requirements, and contact function.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRefer to the actually applicable SLA\/OLA or decision – do not invent service levels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eReview security, personal data, and publication authority.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eApprove, publish, and perform a separate post-publication review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlan recurring reviews and version control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSuitable for Corporate IT and IT Service Providers\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe package provides a consistent presentation of services for IT departments, system administrators, service desks, and smaller providers. To organize technical systems and management responsibilities, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/systemforvaltningsplan-it-systemregister-2026-2027-systemagare-risker-arshjul-svenska-english-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eSystem Administration Plan \u0026amp; IT System Register\u003c\/a\u003e is also available. For measuring and monitoring existing service levels, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/sla-rapport-it-driftuppfoljning-2027\"\u003eSLA Report \u0026amp; IT Operations Monitoring\u003c\/a\u003e. These address other parts of IT management and are not replaced by a service catalogue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between a service catalogue and a system inventory?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA service catalogue describes what users or customers can get, how it is ordered, and who is responsible. A system or configuration register, on the other hand, describes the technical and organizational components that support the services.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include ready-made IT services with guaranteed support times?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. You get editable templates and empty registers, not actual services, guaranteed response times, or pre-negotiated delivery terms. All such information must be filled in based on your organization's actual decisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Excel register an automated ordering portal?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is an administrative register with validation and summarization. It does not create accounts, send orders, monitor operations, or make decisions about eligibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the service catalogue be used for external customers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, after internal review of agreements, accuracy, confidentiality, rights, and publication authority. The catalogue text itself does not change existing agreements or automatically give the customer the right to a service.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the Word and PDF files editable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe DOCX files can be edited in compatible programs. The PDF files are searchable and intended for reading or printing, but no interactive PDF forms are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs everything in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. An English User Guide in Word and PDF is included, but the five working documents themselves are in Swedish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the package meet ITIL or ISO\/IEC 20000-1?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo certification or guaranteed regulatory compliance is included. The package has been designed with established methodological principles in mind, but proper service management requires that the organization actually implements and follows relevant processes, agreements, and requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity, Sources, and Version\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvoid passwords, private keys, sensitive system details, and unnecessary personal data in a catalogue that may be accessed by unauthorized persons. Use access control and established publication routines. Methodological references: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/atv.peoplecert.org\/accreditation\/accreditation-model\/\"\u003ePeopleCert – ITIL-Related Service Catalogue Management\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.iso.org\/standard\/70636.html\"\u003eISO\/IEC 20000-1:2018 – Service management system requirements\u003c\/a\u003e. The references do not mean that PeopleCert or ISO has approved the product. \u003cstrong\u003eVersion 1.0, 29 October 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e AI-assisted methodological review; no external legal review or ITIL\/ISO certification has been performed.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56376524013910,"sku":"IT-SERVICE-CATALOG-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_IT_Tjanstekatalog_huvudbild_1600.jpg?v=1793267289"},{"product_id":"testmiljo-testdatahantering-miljoregister-excel","title":"Test Environment \u0026 Test Data Management – Environment Register, Test Data Request, and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTest Environment \u0026amp; Test Data Management – seven editable Word documents and corresponding searchable PDFs, plus an Excel register.\u003c\/strong\u003e For IT managers, test leads, system owners, and project teams who need to document how test environments and test data are created, approved, protected, used, and decommissioned.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe focus is on scoped test data, documented environment isolation, clear responsibilities, and actual evidence of controls. The templates are intended for Swedish businesses and can be used for system development, integration testing, new SaaS services, and internal change projects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#F1F6FA;border:2px solid #416d8b;border-radius:10px;padding:16px 19px;margin:18px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"color:#173A57;margin:0 0 8px\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 files in a ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e five Swedish main templates, one Swedish user guide, and one English user guide, each in editable Word (DOCX) and a corresponding searchable PDF. An Excel workbook (XLSX) with nine tabs is also included. There are seven documents in two formats, not fourteen different templates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#F1F6FA;border:2px solid #416d8b;border-radius:10px;padding:16px 19px;margin:18px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"color:#173A57;margin:0 0 8px\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eTest environment plan and inventory, test data plan and data minimization, test data request and decision, pseudonymization and data protection control, access, and secure decommissioning, plus two guides. The Excel register compiles environments, datasets, requests, controls, tests, access, and deviations in a dashboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich Documents Are Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTest environment plan \u0026amp; environment inventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e define the testing purpose, system versions, environment owner, dependencies, isolation from production, and operational controls.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTest data plan \u0026amp; data minimization:\u003c\/strong\u003e specify which data is needed, justify the selection, choose synthetic data where possible, and document retention and deletion.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTest data request \u0026amp; approval:\u003c\/strong\u003e record the request, dataset ID, permitted uses, decision, access period, and closure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePseudonymization protection control:\u003c\/strong\u003e evaluate selected protection measures, key pairing, re-identification risk, logs, and test result control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTest environment access \u0026amp; decommissioning:\u003c\/strong\u003e list permissions, check system connections, and document actual restoration and decommissioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide:\u003c\/strong\u003e proposed workflow, controls, and essential boundaries.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide:\u003c\/strong\u003e English instructions for the Swedish main templates. The main templates are not fully translated.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel – Test Environment Register and Dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbook includes \u003cstrong\u003eDashboard, Read Me, Environments, Datasets, Requests, Protection Measures, Tests, Access, and Deviations\u003c\/strong\u003e. Each register contains fields for unique identifiers, responsibility, status, and actual evidence references. Status fields have predefined options. The dashboard summarizes, among other things, the number of environments, datasets containing personal data, open requests, failed protection controls, failed tests, and access.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExcel uses formulas for compilation, but \u003cstrong\u003edoes not perform any automatic anonymization, masking, test execution, permission assignment, data transfer, or deletion\u003c\/strong\u003e. The recorded status is not an approval of data protection, security, or an actually performed test.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDescribe the test environment, responsible function, system version, and dependencies. Check that testing does not unintentionally send messages or transactions to production recipients.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCreate a plan for the minimum necessary test data. Prioritize purely synthetic data when it meets the purpose.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIf personal data may be needed: assess the legal basis, purpose, minimization, permission, and appropriate protection measures separately. Use the request and control protocols for actually approved datasets. Store only references, not secret keys or personal data, in the templates.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument actual test results and deviations in Excel and link to secure evidence.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eClose environment access, delete or retain data according to the documented decision, and technically verify the result.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eData Protection and Legal Prerequisites\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGDPR Articles 5 and 6:\u003c\/strong\u003e if personal data is processed in the test environment, the legal basis, relevant purposes, and principles such as data minimization and storage minimization must be assessed. Test environments are not exempt just because the environment is called \"test\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGDPR Articles 25 and 32:\u003c\/strong\u003e risk-based data protection through design and default settings, as well as appropriate technical and organizational security measures, must be considered when personal data is processed. See the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/eur-lex.europa.eu\/eli\/reg\/2016\/679\/oj?locale=sv\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eData Protection Regulation on EUR-Lex\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDifference between anonymization and pseudonymization:\u003c\/strong\u003e data that has been pseudonymized can still be personal data when identification is possible with additional information. A test dataset does not automatically become anonymous because name fields have been replaced. Even synthetic test data derived from real records should be reviewed for the risk of information leakage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAdditional assessment:\u003c\/strong\u003e processing by a personal data processor, sensitive data, or high-risk processing may require separate contractual documentation, special protections, and sometimes a data protection impact assessment. The package does not perform such assessments for the buyer and does not constitute certification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a test environment plan?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA description of which system and which integrations are to be tested, in which environment, by whom, with what data, and under which approved controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs real customer data needed for testing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot necessarily. Synthetic data should be considered first. If real personal data is needed, it must be justified and covered by relevant data protection and security measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs pseudonymized test data anonymous?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not automatically. If a person can be identified using other information, GDPR may still apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Excel file contain real customer data or example personal identity numbers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The customer file is delivered as an empty register with clear columns and manual selections, without sample data containing personal data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the templates be used for acceptance testing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThey help with the environment and test data. For formal delivery approval and testing against acceptance criteria, additional testing and decision-making documentation is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files fillable forms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe PDF files are searchable read-only and print versions. Fill in or edit the content in Word; interactive PDF forms are not promised.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre technical scripts included that anonymize data?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package contains administrative working documents and Excel registers, not executable masking code or an automatic protection system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all the templates in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFive main templates and the Swedish guide are in Swedish. A separate English-language user guide is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated Products\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor subsequent testing of a completed IT system, \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/acceptansprovning-leveransgodkannande-it-2027\"\u003eAcceptance Testing \u0026amp; IT Delivery Approval\u003c\/a\u003e is available. \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/backupplan-sakerhetskopiering-aterlasningstest-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eBackup Plan \u0026amp; Restore Testing\u003c\/a\u003e can be used as a complement for documenting restoration control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFormat, Delivery, and Review\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVersion 1.0 – October 29, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital ZIP, 15 files (7 DOCX, 7 PDF, 1 XLSX). Swedish legal basis and English help instructions. AI-assisted source control of the official text of the GDPR, but no external legal review, penetration testing, third-party certification, or actual technical testing. The digital file is delivered only after the seller manually links the file and activates the product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56377094340950,"sku":"TESTMILJO-TESTDATA-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/testmiljo-testdata-huvudbild_28f372f5-7599-4ac0-93a9-eac8652497db.png?v=1793268244"},{"product_id":"systemintegration-api-dokumentation-word-pdf-excel","title":"System Integration \u0026 API Documentation – Interfaces, Field Mapping, and Excel Registers | Word\/PDF\/Excel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSystem Integration \u0026amp; API Documentation\u003c\/strong\u003e is a digital template package for IT projects, system management, and development teams that need to document how two systems exchange information. Create interface descriptions, field mapping, error handling procedures, test protocols, and versioning documentation. The package contains \u003cstrong\u003e15 document files in Word, searchable PDF, and Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e in a digital ZIP file.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:18px 20px;border:2px solid #2363A0;background:#EFF5FC;border-radius:9px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;font-size:1.22rem\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e7 editable Word files (DOCX), 7 searchable and printable PDF files, and 1 Excel workbook (XLSX)\u003c\/strong\u003e. Five Swedish main templates, one Swedish user guide, and one English-language user guide. The Excel workbook contains nine tabs. The delivery is digital via ZIP after purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:18px 20px;border:2px solid #2363A0;background:#EFF5FC;border-radius:9px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;font-size:1.22rem\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eInterface specifications for APIs and other integration patterns, data contracts and field mapping, documentation of error codes and retries, test cases with acceptance decisions, and procedures for version changes and reviews. The Excel register has separate entries for integrations, endpoints, field mapping, error codes, tests, risks, changes, and decisions. \u003cstrong\u003eReference checks highlight missing integration IDs\u003c\/strong\u003e, while the summary only counts registered items.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is an Integration Specification?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn integration specification describes which system produces and receives information, the data format and exchange method, expected responses, error handling, security, and responsibilities. It is used, for example, between business systems, e-commerce, financial systems, CRM, and other applications. The template provides an editable documentation basis, but is \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c\/strong\u003e an executable API implementation, automatic OpenAPI generator, or validated system connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAll Documents and Formats\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;background:#E5EFFA;padding:9px\"\u003eNo.\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;background:#E5EFFA;padding:9px\"\u003eFile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;background:#E5EFFA;padding:9px\"\u003eContent\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;background:#E5EFFA;padding:9px\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInterface Specification\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003ePurpose, system responsibility, endpoints, versions, data model, and information security\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eField Mapping and Data Contract\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eSource fields, target fields, data types, transformations, mandatory fields, and error rules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eError Handling and Deployment\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eResponse codes, idempotency, retries, logging, support, and rollback\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIntegration Testing and Acceptance\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eNormal cases, validation, timeout, access, version changes, and documented evidence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVersion Changes and Integration Review\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eBackward compatibility, consumer impact, decommissioning, and audit control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eStep-by-step workflow, methodology sources, security boundaries, and version control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish documents, not translated templates\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eExcel Register (9 tabs)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eOverview, Integrations, Endpoints, Field Mapping, Error Codes, Tests, Risks, Changes, Decisions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #D8E5F2\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Excel Register – Nine Tabs with Clear Checkpoints\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Excel workbook contains \u003cstrong\u003eOverview, Integrations, Endpoints, Field Mapping, Error Codes, Tests, Risks, Changes, and Decisions\u003c\/strong\u003e. Link entries using unique integration IDs. The register check can mark references as “OK” or “MISSING”. Risk scores are calculated based on an internal scale of 1–5 for probability and impact. The example threshold of 15 is an administrative follow-up measure, not an automatically determined acceptance level. Actual technical checks and formal decisions must be carried out separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRegister the integration with a unique ID and clear ownership.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDescribe the source system, target system, flow direction, format, frequency, and business benefit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument fields, transformation rules, validation, and schema references.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAssess the information's protection requirements, permissions, logging, and any personal data.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlan test cases, error handling, retries, idempotency, and any recovery.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePerform actual integration tests and collect evidence in an approved test environment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEstablish version control, decision authority, management, and review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich Other Mallbutiken Products Complement This?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor general system management procedures, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/systemforvaltningsplan-it-systemregister-2026-2027-systemagare-risker-arshjul-svenska-english-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eSystem Management Plan \u0026amp; IT System Register\u003c\/a\u003e. For a separate assignment to perform acceptance testing, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/acceptansprovning-leveransgodkannande-it-2027\"\u003eAcceptance Testing \u0026amp; IT Delivery Approval\u003c\/a\u003e. If you need contract regulation between SaaS parties, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/saas-avtal-mall-svensk-ratt-word-pdf\"\u003eSaaS Agreement Under Swedish Law\u003c\/a\u003e. These are separate products with a different focus.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions About API and Integration Documentation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Package Include a Machine-Readable OpenAPI File?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The package contains Word, PDF, and Excel, not OpenAPI in JSON or YAML. For actual OpenAPI validation, you need an approved machine-readable API schema and a suitable technical tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I Document File Transfers and Interfaces Other Than REST?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The forms are method-neutral where possible and include fields for protocols, file transfers, event-driven flows, and other exchange patterns. Customize fields and requirements according to the actual solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Excel Check Verify That the APIs Work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Excel check refers to register references and simple risk calculation. It does not make API calls or verify that an interface works, is available, or is secure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat Does a Data Contract Mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA technical basis that describes the format, fields, data types, mandatory values, and versioning rules for an information exchange. The template does not automatically create a legally binding agreement between parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I Use Real Personal Data in the Test Examples?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvoid this. Use synthetic data and the organization's own protection and test data processes. Never enter passwords, API keys, tokens, or other secrets in the templates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF Files Fillable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey are searchable and printable. Edit the Word versions and Excel workbook to enter information. Interactive PDF forms are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the Templates Certified According to ISO, OpenAPI, or Any Regulatory Standard?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. They are standalone document templates with methodology references. Actual requirements depend on the organization, agreement, technology, and applicable regulations. No external security or legal review has been conducted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich Languages Are Included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe five operational documents and the Swedish user guide are in Swedish. A separate English User Guide explains how the files are used, but the main templates are not translated into English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMethodology Sources and Version\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMethodology support from \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.digg.se\/kunskap-och-stod\/oppna-och-delade-data\/vagledning-for-att-tillgangliggora-information\"\u003eDigg – Guidance for Information and APIs\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/graphql.digg.se\/assets\/dataportal\/uploads\/REST_API_profil_v_1_2_0_ad50df0ab9.pdf\"\u003eDigg – REST API Profile 1.2.0\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/spec.openapis.org\/oas\/v3.2\"\u003eOpenAPI Specification\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/introduktion-till-gdpr\/dataskyddsforordningen-i-fulltext\/\"\u003eGDPR Article 32 via IMY\u003c\/a\u003e. Public standards and guidance have their own scopes and do not constitute approvals of Mallbutiken's documents. \u003cstrong\u003eDocument version 1.0, October 29, 2026. AI-assisted methodology check, no external specialist review.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56377146376534,"sku":"SYS-INTEGRATION-API-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_Systemintegration_API_Huvudbild_1600.jpg?v=1793268306"},{"product_id":"it-driftovervakning-larmhantering-word-pdf-excel","title":"IT Operations Monitoring \u0026 Alarm Management – Monitoring Plan, Alarm Matrix, and Excel | Word\/PDF\/Excel","description":"\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Operations Monitoring \u0026amp; Incident Management\u003c\/strong\u003e is a digital template package for businesses, IT support, and system administrators who want to document how critical IT services are monitored, which situations should trigger alerts, and how responsibility, acknowledgment, escalation, and follow-up are managed. You get editable Word templates, searchable PDF files, and a structured Excel register. The package is a \u003cstrong\u003emanual documentation aid\u003c\/strong\u003e, not software that monitors systems or sends alerts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#eef5fc;border:2px solid #285f9e;border-radius:10px;padding:18px 2020px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 8px\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files in a ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e five Swedish work templates and two user guides in both editable Word (DOCX) and searchable, printable PDF, plus an Excel workbook (XLSX) with nine tabs. Total \u003cstrong\u003e7 DOCX + 7 PDF + 1 XLSX\u003c\/strong\u003e. The English guide explains the Swedish templates; English versions of the main templates are not included. Digital download, no physical delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#eef5fc;border:2px solid #285f9e;border-radius:10px;padding:18px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin:0 0 8px\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eMonitoring plan for systems and metrics, alert matrix with locally determined priorities, escalation procedure for staffing, alert assessment with separate acknowledgment and action, and audit log for false alarms and effectiveness control. The \u003cstrong\u003eExcel register\u003c\/strong\u003e contains systems, alert rules, alert events, escalations, actions, tests, and audits with identity checks and calculation of acknowledgment time when dates and times are correctly filled in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is a monitoring plan and alert matrix?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA monitoring plan describes which IT services and metrics an organization monitors and how the controls are organized. An alert matrix links an indicator, a measurable threshold, an internal priority level, and a recipient role. The escalation procedure describes who should take over when an alert is not acknowledged or the impact increases. The package helps document these decisions, but the user must determine the times, roles, and control levels themselves based on actual operations and risks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAll Documents in the Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;background:#dceaf7;text-align:left\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;background:#dceaf7;text-align:left\"\u003eContent\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;background:#dceaf7;text-align:left\"\u003eLanguage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;background:#dceaf7;text-align:left\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eMonitoring Plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSystems, metrics, goals, responsibilities, and control intervals\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eAlert Matrix and Alert Rules\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eInternal priorities, thresholds, alert recipients, and regular testing plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEscalation and Staffing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eContact roles, backup routes, handover requirements, and local escalation steps\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eAlert Assessment and Acknowledgment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eAlert identity, impact, actually acknowledged alert, and action log\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eAlert Audit and Effectiveness Control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEvaluation of alerts, false alarms, completed actions, and verified effectiveness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eStep-by-step, document control, security and data protection boundaries\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish work templates\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eExcel Register, Nine Tabs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSystems, alert rules, alert events, escalations, actions, tests, and audits\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e2f0;vertical-align:top\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel Tool – Nine Tabs and Ten Key Metrics\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbook contains \u003cstrong\u003eOverview, Systems, Alert Rules, Alert Events, Escalation, Actions, Tests, Audits, and Read Me\u003c\/strong\u003e. The overview summarizes, among other things, the number of systems, alert rules, registered alerts, open alerts, P1 alerts, escalations, completed actions, and verified actions. Posts are only counted when unique ID fields have been filled in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe registers check whether the referenced System ID, Rule ID, and Alert ID exist, as well as calculate the time between the alert and acknowledgment. An acknowledgment is not automatically a solution, and a completed action is not automatically verified. The recalculation of formulas should be checked in the spreadsheet software used. None of this implies automatic technical monitoring or legal compliance control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWorkflow – From Alert Rule to Verified Effectiveness\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRegister services and systems, and appoint system owners and monitoring responsibilities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDocument monitoring goals, data sources, metrics, thresholds, and controls.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDetermine internal priority levels P1–P4 and appropriate recipient and backup roles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTest an alert rule in a controlled situation and document the test results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eLog actual alerts with separate times for the alert, acknowledgment, and completed action.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEscalate when necessary and document who actually took over.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFollow up on false alarms, missed alerts, actions, and verified effects in recurring audits.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the Package Suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor small and medium-sized businesses that need to supplement their technical monitoring tools with clear internal work procedures and traceable follow-up. For periodic measurement of agreed service levels, there is a separate \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/sla-rapport-it-driftuppfoljning-2027\"\u003eSLA Report \u0026amp; IT Operations Follow-up\u003c\/a\u003e. This product does not include an SLA agreement, an actual monitoring system, or a tool for automatic log analysis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the package include a program that sends alerts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It consists of editable documents and a manual Excel register. Any technical alert systems, integrations, and communication tools must be procured and configured separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre P1–P4 universal or legally mandated alert levels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The priorities are examples of an internal classification. The organization must define itself which events belong to each level and what that means for staffing and escalation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between acknowledged, actioned, and verified?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAcknowledged means that someone has received the alert. Actioned means that an activity has been performed. Verified means that a controlled result exists according to established criteria. The templates keep these steps separate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Excel calculate response time automatically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, there is a formula that can calculate the number of minutes from the alert time to the acknowledgment time when both are registered as valid dates and times. It does not assess whether the response time meets an agreement or a security requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan we register personal data and security logs in Excel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAvoid unnecessary personal data, authentication credentials, passwords, and raw log data. The business must assess the purpose, legal basis, access, deletion, and information to those affected, especially if employees' activities can be monitored.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files fillable forms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The PDF files are searchable and printable. Use the Word versions to edit the templates. The Excel register is intended for ongoing register work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the product NIS2-, GDPR-, NIST-, or ISO-approved?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The documents are voluntary method templates that do not guarantee regulatory compliance and have not been certified or externally approved. Sector-specific requirements, agreements, and the organization's actual risks must be assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMethod Sources, Legal Boundaries, and Version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMethod references: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.fedramp.gov\/2026\/providers\/rev5\/controls\/system-and-information-integrity\/\"\u003eNIST SP 800-53 SI-04 System Monitoring\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.fedramp.gov\/2026\/providers\/rev5\/controls\/audit-and-accountability\/\"\u003eAU-06 Audit Record Review\u003c\/a\u003e via FedRAMP, as well as \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/dataskydd-pa-olika-omraden\/arbetsliv\/kontroll-och-overvakning-av-anstallda\/\"\u003eIMY – Monitoring and Control of Employees\u003c\/a\u003e. The sources have been used as a basis for the method and do not imply that any authority has reviewed or approved Mallbutikens files. \u003cstrong\u003eVersion 1.0, October 29, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e AI-assisted source and method control; no external legal or security review has been performed.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56377262375254,"sku":"IT-MONITOR-LARM-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/01_IT_Driftovervakning_Huvudbild_1600.jpg?v=1793269165"},{"product_id":"patchhantering-sarbarhetsregister-riskprioritering-excel","title":"Patch Management \u0026 Vulnerability Register – Risk Prioritization, Testing, and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePatch Management \u0026amp; Vulnerability Register – professional template package in Word, PDF and Excel for security updates.\u003c\/strong\u003e Take control of how IT vulnerabilities are documented, prioritized, remediated and verified. For Swedish companies, IT managers, system owners and operations organizations that need clear decision-making support, traceable control points and documented risk exceptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThese are \u003cstrong\u003eeditable administrative document templates\u003c\/strong\u003e – not a vulnerability scanner, patch management tool, automated risk analysis or certification. The package can be used together with existing systems for asset registers, monitoring and change management.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is patch management and vulnerability prioritization?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePatch management involves identifying relevant security updates, determining which installations are actually affected, prioritizing based on risk, planning testing and deployment, and verifying the actual result. A vulnerability in a product bulletin does not mean that all installations are vulnerable. Therefore, fields for system version, asset ID, vendor reference, exposure surface and uncertainty are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #3e6c8d;background:#edf5fa;padding:17px 20px;border-radius:11px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#193f60\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files in a ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e five Swedish working documents, one Swedish user guide and a separate English User Guide – all seven delivered in editable Word format (DOCX) and as a corresponding searchable PDF – plus an Excel workbook (XLSX) with nine tabs. There are seven unique documents in two formats, not 14 different templates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:2px solid #3e6c8d;background:#edf5fa;padding:17px 20px;border-radius:11px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#193f60\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003ePatch policy and allocation of responsibilities, vulnerability assessment with risk prioritization, patch plan including testing and rollback, risk exceptions with compensating controls, verification and closure protocols, two user guides and an Excel register. The dashboard summarizes manually registered items and their status; no systems are scanned or updated automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Five Working Templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatch policy \u0026amp; responsibilities:\u003c\/strong\u003e determine which assets are covered, sources of vulnerability information, responsible roles, internal response time after risk assessment and decision mandate for deviations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVulnerability assessment \u0026amp; risk prioritization:\u003c\/strong\u003e document vendor notification, any CVE ID, affected product versions, technical exposure, business impact, timeline and residual risk.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatch plan, testing \u0026amp; rollback:\u003c\/strong\u003e plan maintenance windows, compatibility checks, test scenarios, technically feasible rollback, authorized GO\/NO-GO decision and version control after implementation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRisk exceptions \u0026amp; compensating controls:\u003c\/strong\u003e describe why a patch needs to be postponed, what temporary protections are introduced, who accepts the residual risk and when the exception should last be reviewed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatch verification \u0026amp; closure protocol:\u003c\/strong\u003e record observed version, actual test result, post-check, residual vulnerabilities, evidence and authorized closure test.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGuides and Languages\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide:\u003c\/strong\u003e workflow from system inventory and risk assessment to patch plan, follow-up and final check. \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide:\u003c\/strong\u003e instructions in English for using the Swedish main templates. The main templates are not translated into English, and the English guide does not constitute an adaptation to foreign law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel Register with Nine Tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbook contains \u003cstrong\u003eDashboard, Read Me, Assets, Vulnerabilities, Patches, Risk Exceptions, Tests, Actions and Verification\u003c\/strong\u003e. Keep information together with stable CI IDs, VUL IDs, PATCH IDs and EXC IDs, record decision-makers and link statuses to actual evidence of control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dashboard displays nine key metrics: registered assets, open vulnerabilities, high or urgent risks, planned and verified patches, approved exceptions, failed tests, open actions and verifications with deviations. The metrics are based on \u003cstrong\u003emanually entered register data\u003c\/strong\u003e. Marking \"Verified\" in Excel is not equivalent to an actual security test or a technically confirmed installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Package – Step by Step\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eInventory the affected systems and record system owners, product, actual version and operating environment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCheck the vendor's vulnerability bulletin and whether the identified vulnerability actually affects the installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePerform a documented risk assessment based on technical exposure, potential exploitation, business impact and existing protection.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eChoose an update, compensating measure or a time-limited, risk-owner-approved exception with follow-up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlan compatibility testing, maintenance windows, user communication and a practically tested rollback solution where needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePerform actions in an authorized technical environment, check the actual version and preserve references to verification evidence.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eClose the case only after an actual check or clearly document what remains, who accepts it and when it should be reviewed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal and Technical Prerequisites\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRisk-based security:\u003c\/strong\u003e if the IT service processes personal data, GDPR Article 32 sets requirements for appropriate technical and organizational security measures with regard to the risks. The Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection mentions, among other things, updating (patching) and hardening as examples of possible technical security measures. Read \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/informationssakerhet\/sakerhetsatgarder\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY's guidance on security measures\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/introduktion-till-gdpr\/dataskyddsforordningen-i-fulltext\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eGDPR in full text\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical best practice:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/csrc.nist.gov\/pubs\/sp\/800\/40\/r4\/final\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eNIST SP 800-40 Rev. 4\u003c\/a\u003e describes systematic patch management, prioritization and verification. The standard is international technical guidance and does not in itself constitute a general binding Swedish legal requirement or a fixed deadline for all patches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLimitations:\u003c\/strong\u003e some organizations are covered by specific sector regulations, agreements or authority requirements. These must be assessed separately. The template package does not assign automatic patch deadlines, approve risk exceptions or replace technical security review. No secrets, passwords or access tokens should be entered into the documents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between patch management and vulnerability management?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVulnerability management involves the discovery, confirmation, assessment and follow-up of weaknesses. Patch management is an important possible measure when a relevant available update exists, but some weaknesses require different handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel check if a server is updated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel collects manual items and statuses. The actual system version and any residual vulnerabilities must be checked in a relevant technical tool or with another documented method.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a vulnerability register with CVE references come with it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The register has columns for vendor or CVE, risk class, exposure factors, status, responsibility and action reference. The fields are empty and filled with your actual data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I document a decision to postpone a security update?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The risk exception template contains justification, time, decision-maker, compensating controls and follow-up. A registered justification is not in itself an authorized or legally sufficient approval.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there a fixed Swedish statutory deadline for all patches?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, no such general deadline is established in the package. Timeframes need to be determined based on risk and any special applicable regulations or agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files fillable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe PDF files are searchable reading versions of the Word documents. Edit the templates in Word or a compatible word processor; interactive PDF forms are not promised.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the templates certified according to ISO or NIS2?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The material is a tool for internal documentation and does not constitute certification, authority review or guaranteed compliance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eComplementary Documents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor checking system dependencies, there is \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/cmdb-konfigurationsregister-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eCMDB \u0026amp; Configuration Register\u003c\/a\u003e (may be unpublished). For change decisions, there is \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-andringsbegaran-andringsstyrning-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eIT Change Request \u0026amp; Change Management\u003c\/a\u003e (may be unpublished). For separate read-back testing, there is \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/backupplan-sakerhetskopiering-aterlasningstest-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eBackup Plan \u0026amp; Read-back Test\u003c\/a\u003e. These documents complement each other, but do not in themselves constitute a fully implemented IT security process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProduct Information and Delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProduct version 1.0, 29 October 2026. 15 digital files in ZIP. Swedish Word and PDF templates, English help instructions, macro-free Excel register. AI-assisted review of public sources, no external legal or security consultant review. Digital file delivery is activated only when the seller has linked the ZIP package to the correct Shopify variant and checked the download.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56378226180438,"sku":"PATCH-SARBARHET-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/patchhantering-sarbarhetsregister-huvudbild_2180c38d-66d2-4223-9b15-b7a0cdb1095a.png?v=1793271677"},{"product_id":"it-kapacitetsplanering-belastningstest-prognos-excel","title":"IT Capacity Planning \u0026 Load Testing – Capacity Forecast, Test Protocol and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Capacity Planning \u0026amp; Load Testing – template package with capacity plan, load testing protocol, and Excel register.\u003c\/strong\u003e For Swedish companies, IT managers, system owners, operations teams, and project managers who want to monitor how IT systems handle increasing load. Document current capacity, performance requirements, actual measurements, forecasts, and agreed improvements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEditable administrative templates – not software for conducting the tests themselves.\u003c\/strong\u003e No file in the package sends test traffic, scans systems, automatically measures CPU or response times, runs traffic against external APIs, or initiates operational changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen are a capacity plan and a load testing protocol useful?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen a digital service gets more users, higher transaction volumes, or new integration requirements, the responsible organization needs to be able to distinguish between actually measured performance, agreed service levels, and assumptions about future load. The package serves as a traceable basis for system changes, major campaigns, cloud scaling, development releases, or recurring capacity reviews.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#eff6fa;border:2px solid #416d89;border-radius:11px;padding:17px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#183f5c\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files in a ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e five Swedish work templates, one Swedish user guide, and one English User Guide. Each of the seven documents is available as an editable Word (DOCX) file and a corresponding searchable PDF. The package also includes a macro-free Excel register (XLSX) with nine tabs. There are seven different documents in two formats, not fourteen separate work templates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#eff6fa;border:2px solid #416d89;border-radius:11px;padding:17px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#183f5c\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eIT capacity plan with responsibilities and goals, measurement protocol for an actual baseline, load testing plan with safety limits, capacity forecast and scaling options, performance deviation protocol and remediation decisions, two guides, and an Excel register with a dashboard and utilization calculation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eContents – File by File\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"overflow-x:auto\"\u003e\u003ctable style=\"border-collapse:collapse;width:100%\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr style=\"background:#e8f1f7\"\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eUse Case\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003e01 IT Capacity Plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003eCapacity requirements, system responsibilities, critical dependencies, measurement method, internal thresholds, and decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003e02 Capacity Measurement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003eBaseline protocol with actual measurements, units, response time percentiles, measurement quality, and observations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003e03 Load Testing – Plan and Protocol\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003eApproved load profile, permissions, stop criteria, technical measurements, test results, and evidence references.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003e04 Capacity Forecast \u0026amp; Scaling Plan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003eGrowth and high-load scenarios, capacity margin, cost, lead time, and documented scaling decision.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003e05 Performance Deviation \u0026amp; Remediation Decision\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDescription of bottleneck, confirmed observation, improvement, post-test, and conclusion.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003e06 Swedish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003eWorkflow, formula descriptions, data protection, and methodological limitations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003e07 English User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish instructions for the Swedish main documents; not a full translation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003e08 Excel Register\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9;vertical-align:top\"\u003eNine tabs with a dashboard, systems, measurements, forecasts, tests, risks, remediation, and decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e0e9\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel with Nine Tabs and a Dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard, Read Me, Systems, Measurements, Forecasts, Load Tests, Risks, Remediation, and Decisions.\u003c\/strong\u003e The register tabs contain fields for system ID, test and measurement ID, responsibility, status, agreed metrics, and references to actual test results. Status values are selected manually and help identify open issues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn \u003cstrong\u003eMeasurements\u003c\/strong\u003e, utilization is calculated based on \u003cem\u003emeasured peak divided by stated capacity\u003c\/em\u003e when both values are available and refer to the same unit and comparable measurement period. Without entered numbers, the result remains empty. The dashboard summarizes nine key metrics, including registered systems, completed measurements, established forecasts, failed tests, open risks, and remediation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn illustrative review signal is displayed for utilization over 90%. That threshold is \u003cstrong\u003enot a generally accepted technical goal, a legal rule, or an automatic operational alarm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The organization must establish relevant levels for each system itself. No test data or measured performance values are pre-filled in the customer file.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Templates – Six Work Steps\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDefine the service and requirements.\u003c\/strong\u003e Document systems, environment, actual version, use case, owner, and agreed target state for response time and availability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCollect a comparable baseline.\u003c\/strong\u003e Note the actual measurement period, measurement tool, user volume, P95\/P99, throughput, error rate, and CPU, memory, and storage where relevant.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssess peak load and uncertainty.\u003c\/strong\u003e Identify seasonality, growth, integrations, cloud quotas, and potential bottlenecks. Clearly state assumptions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan the test safely.\u003c\/strong\u003e Ensure permissions, a controlled test environment, synthetic data where possible, stop criteria, and a responsible observer. Never direct test traffic to a third-party service without explicit permission.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDocument actual test results.\u003c\/strong\u003e State the load profile, measurements, actual deviation, and reference to protected technical evidence. Do not mark a test as passed solely because the planning is complete.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecide, verify, and follow up.\u003c\/strong\u003e Document improvement decisions, responsibility, funding, post-testing, and remaining capacity risk.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish Legal Requirements and Important Methodological Limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGDPR Article 32:\u003c\/strong\u003e When IT systems process personal data, data controllers and data processors must implement risk-appropriate technical and organizational security measures. The provision includes, where appropriate, the ability to maintain the availability and resilience of systems, as well as procedures to regularly test and evaluate the effectiveness of security measures. Read \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/introduktion-till-gdpr\/dataskyddsforordningen-i-fulltext\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY's reproduction of the General Data Protection Regulation\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eArticle 32 does \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c\/strong\u003e establish a universal maximum response time, a mandatory 90 percent capacity threshold, or a specific load testing range for all systems. Permissions and the protection of test data must be assessed within the organization's own environment. Test traffic can cause operational disruptions and should not be conducted without the organization's permission and appropriate risk control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a non-binding supplementary reference, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.msb.se\/contentassets\/af96031de7124f69a19fb936b78a478b\/fspos-vagledning-for-kontinuitetshantering-v.-6.0-2024.pdf\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eMSB's FSPOS guidance on continuity management\u003c\/a\u003e addresses dependencies and critical resources. This guidance is not in itself a legal requirement for a specific capacity template or numerical test level. Separate sector regulations, agreements, and supplier terms must be evaluated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is an IT capacity plan?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA document showing which resources a service needs now and in the future, how actual capacity should be measured, and who decides on changes when requirements or load increase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat distinguishes a load test from a regular operational measurement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn operational measurement observes an actual system under its normal traffic. A load test involves a pre-planned and controlled load profile to investigate, for example, response times, errors, and bottlenecks. The package plans and documents the test but does not run it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Excel generate automatic capacity forecasts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel calculates the registered utilization and summarizes manual statuses. The forecasting method, assumptions, and future needs must be documented separately in the forecast tab and Word template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I run a load test directly with the Word or Excel file?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. No scripts, cloud integrations, live monitoring, or traffic-generating tools are included. Technical testing must be conducted in a separate approved system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs 90 percent utilization always too high?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The dashboard uses 90 percent as an illustrative review signal, not a general error condition. The acceptable level depends on resources, response time requirements, load patterns, and system architecture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use actual personal data in the load test?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConsider synthetic or appropriately protected data first. If personal data must be processed, an independent legal and security assessment is required, including access and storage needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files fillable forms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The PDFs are searchable read-only versions. The Word files are intended for editing, and the Excel register is used for structured follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all templates in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe five main templates are in Swedish. One Swedish and one English user guide are included. English User Guide does not mean that the main documents are translated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated Documents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor ongoing monitoring and compilation of service levels, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/sla-rapport-it-driftuppfoljning-2027\"\u003eSLA Report \u0026amp; IT Operations Follow-up\u003c\/a\u003e. For responsibility, system risks, and the annual cycle, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/systemforvaltningsplan-it-systemregister-2026-2027-systemagare-risker-arshjul-svenska-english-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eSystem Management Plan \u0026amp; IT System Register\u003c\/a\u003e. If backup routines and actual recovery capability need to be checked, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/backupplan-sakerhetskopiering-aterlasningstest-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eBackup Plan \u0026amp; Recovery Test\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFiles, Version, and Delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVersion 1.0, October 29, 2026. 15 files in a digital ZIP: 7 DOCX, 7 searchable PDFs, and 1 XLSX. The documents have been machine and visually quality checked. AI-assisted source control, but no external legal review, independent performance audit, or actual production load testing. Digital file delivery is activated only after the seller manually links the ZIP to the correct Shopify variant and tests the download.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56379013366102,"sku":"IT-KAPACITET-LASTTEST-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/it-kapacitetsplanering-belastningstest-huvudbild_ab1f2d8b-538c-4a7d-ab98-c2fce0a07cce.png?v=1793273591"},{"product_id":"tls-certifikat-domanfornyelse-forfalloregister-excel","title":"TLS Certificates \u0026 Domain Renewal – Expiration Registry, Control Log, and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTLS Certificate \u0026amp; Domain Renewal – practical template package for certificate registries, domain expiration, security checks, and Excel tracking.\u003c\/strong\u003e For businesses, system owners, web administrators, agencies, and IT operations teams that need to document who is responsible for domains and HTTPS certificates, when their validity expires, and how actual renewals are verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA domain registration and a TLS certificate are \u003cstrong\u003etwo different things\u003c\/strong\u003e with different issuers, validity periods, renewal processes, and potential disruptions. The package helps keep them separate, establish internal checkpoints, and provide a traceable record for technical staff. It does not include any domain registration or certificate issuance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#EFF6FA;border:2px solid #46718F;border-radius:12px;padding:16px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#173A57\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files in a digital ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e five Swedish work templates, one Swedish guide, and a separate English User Guide. The seven documents are available in editable Word (DOCX) and as corresponding searchable PDFs. The package also includes an Excel registry (XLSX) with nine tabs. A total of seven unique documents in two formats plus Excel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#EFF6FA;border:2px solid #46718F;border-radius:12px;padding:16px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#173A57\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eDomain inventory, TLS certificate registry, renewal and handover plan, expiration check, incident management and post-check protocol, Swedish and English guides, and Excel dashboard. Excel calculates the days remaining until \u003cstrong\u003emanually entered\u003c\/strong\u003e dates, but does not retrieve live information from the registrar, DNS, or certificate issuer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed List of Templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"overflow-x:auto\"\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr style=\"background:#E8F1F7\"\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px\"\u003eContent\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px\"\u003eFile Format\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e01 Domain Inventory – Registrar, Owner, and Expiration\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eRecord domain names, registrar, holder, allocation of responsibility, payment process, and verified expiration date.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e02 TLS Certificate Inventory\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eCollect hostnames, issuer, certificate validity, service ownership, renewal management, and verification of the actual TLS service.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e03 Renewal Plan and Handover\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003ePlan technical steps, DNS or domain validation, permissions, internal lead time, checks, and post-verification.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e04 Expiration Check and Checklist\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eReview expected and observed expiration dates, actual automatic renewal, alerts, domain status, and certificate chain.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e05 Incident Management and Post-Check\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eHandle expired certificates or domain issues with event logs, responsibility, actions, restoration, and post-checks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e06 Swedish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eWorkflow, legal and technical limitations, and instructions for the Excel registry.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e07 English User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish instructions for using the Swedish main templates; the main templates are not fully translated.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e08 Excel Registry\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDashboard and eight other tabs for domains, certificates, renewals, checks, deviations, actions, and decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7e4eb;padding:9px\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel Registry with Nine Tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbook has \u003cstrong\u003eDashboard, Read Me, Domains, Certificates, Renewals, Checks, Deviations, Actions, and Decisions\u003c\/strong\u003e. Domains and certificates are assigned their own identifiers so they can be linked to responsibility, checks, and renewal cases. The workbook includes status options such as completed, verified, deviation, or under review, depending on the tab.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor both domain and certificate entries, there are fields for the verified expiration date and a calculated column for days remaining. The calculation is based on the entered date and today's date in the spreadsheet program. The dashboard summarizes nine key metrics: registered domains and certificates, dates within 30 days, past dates, renewals, deviations, and open actions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant limitation:\u003c\/strong\u003e 30 days is an illustrative signal for manual review, not a universal legal or technical renewal deadline. Excel \u003cstrong\u003edoes not retrieve current certificates, perform TLS tests, send reminders, or renew domains\u003c\/strong\u003e. A highlighted date or status does not mean that validity has been verified in the actual system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Template Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory domains:\u003c\/strong\u003e identify the actual owner, registrar, person responsible for billing, technical contact, and services that depend on the domain.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory TLS certificates:\u003c\/strong\u003e check which certificates are actually presented by each web server, CDN, API, or other TLS entry point. Record the issuer and actual validity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCheck the renewal method:\u003c\/strong\u003e determine whether the registrar's and certificate issuer's automatic functions are actually active. Also document error notification and backup.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDetermine internal checkpoints:\u003c\/strong\u003e choose a lead time that provides reasonable time to detect and address issues in your own environment. Always read current agreements and CA terms.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan and perform the renewal:\u003c\/strong\u003e an authorized technician checks domain validation, DNS, the certificate name, validity, chain, and dependent services.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVerify afterward:\u003c\/strong\u003e check the certificate that is actually presented to the client and that the domain has actually been renewed in the registry or registrar portal. Enter new dates only after this check.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDocument deviations:\u003c\/strong\u003e note the timestamp, actual impact, person responsible, secure evidence, and the next follow-up date in case of errors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant Legal and Technical Limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDomain registration:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Swedish Internet Foundation describes specific terms for registration periods, expiration, deactivation, and deregistration of .se and .nu domains. Other top-level domains and registrars may have different processes. Check the current terms in the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/internetstiftelsen.se\/domaner\/registrera-ett-domannamn\/se-och-nu-domaner-som-snart-kan-bli-lediga\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eSwedish Internet Foundation's guidance\u003c\/a\u003e and with your own registrar. The template package does not create a legal right to a domain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCertificate renewal:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/letsencrypt.org\/sv\/docs\/integration-guide\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eLet's Encrypt's technical integration guide\u003c\/a\u003e describes, among other things, automated renewal, validation, and error handling. This advice is not a general Swedish statutory renewal deadline, and other certificate issuers may have different procedures. Check the certificate chain and all affected service entry points before concluding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGDPR Article 32:\u003c\/strong\u003e when systems process personal data, appropriate technical and organizational security measures must be taken based on the risks. Encryption, availability, and appropriate control may be relevant, but the provision does not specify a particular certificate renewal routine or general 30-day deadline. See \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/informationssakerhet\/sakerhetsatgarder\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY's guidance on security measures\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProtect secrets:\u003c\/strong\u003e never place private TLS keys, passwords, API tokens, payment cards, or 2FA recovery codes in the Word templates or Excel registry. Use only references to the organization's permission-controlled systems. No external lawyer, registrar, or security consultant has reviewed or certified the package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between a domain name and a TLS certificate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe domain name is a registered internet address with its own registration agreement. The TLS certificate is used, among other things, to enable encrypted and authenticated communication to the correct hostname. Both may have validity periods that need to be followed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel check the expiration date automatically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExcel can calculate the days remaining until an expiration date you have entered yourself. It does not retrieve a new date from the registrar or HTTPS server, which is why the actual validity must be checked separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the registry send automatic email reminders?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Neither email notifications, scheduled tasks, nor calendar integration are included. Use the technical monitoring system or reminder service that your organization has chosen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre certificates renewed automatically by this package?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The templates are for documentation and follow-up. Actual renewal is done with the registrar, certificate issuer, or system platform and must be verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does SAN mean on a TLS certificate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSubject Alternative Name specifies the hostnames for which the certificate was issued. A new certificate should be checked against all hostnames that the service uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the templates for a .com domain?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, as an administrative structure. But .com and other top-level domains are not automatically covered by the Swedish Internet Foundation's .se\/.nu processes; check the current registrar and top-level domain rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files fillable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe PDF files are searchable read-only and print versions. Edit the documents in Word or a compatible word processor. Interactive PDF forms are not promised.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all Word templates in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The five work templates are in Swedish. An English User Guide is included to assist with use, not as a separate legal language version.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated Document Templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor transfer and change of control over domains, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/domanoverlatelse-webbplats-overlamning-2027\"\u003eDomain Transfer \u0026amp; Website Handover\u003c\/a\u003e. For operational alerts and monitoring, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-driftovervakning-larmhantering-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eIT Operations Monitoring \u0026amp; Incident Management\u003c\/a\u003e (may be unpublished). For separate review of log sources, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/sakerhetsloggning-logggranskning-loggregister-excel\"\u003eSecurity Logging \u0026amp; Log Review\u003c\/a\u003e (may be unpublished).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProduct Version, Format, and Delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVersion 1.0, dated October 29, 2026. Digital ZIP with 15 files: 7 editable DOCX, 7 searchable PDFs, and 1 XLSX. AI-assisted source review against government and supplier information; no external legal or technical expert review, no certificate issuances, and no technical renewals performed. The product's digital delivery becomes functional only after the seller's manual file linking and publication check.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56379101938006,"sku":"TLS-DOMAN-FORNYELSE-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/tls-certifikat-domanfornyelse-huvudbild_c9e94fa4-f309-4f0e-a398-af90d94ad0e7.png?v=1793274556"},{"product_id":"it-systemavveckling-applikationsstangning-dataarkiv-excel","title":"IT System Decommissioning \u0026 Application Shutdown – Decommissioning Plan, Data Archive, and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT System Decommissioning \u0026amp; Application Shutdown – decommissioning plan, data archive, technical control and Excel register.\u003c\/strong\u003e Document a controlled shutdown of an application or IT system: which processes are affected, which data must be retained, which integrations must be closed and how the result is actually verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor Swedish companies, system administrators, IT managers, business owners, information managers and project managers. The package focuses on \u003cstrong\u003ethe decommissioning of the IT system itself\u003c\/strong\u003e, not merely the termination of a supplier, hardware replacement or technical data erasure. The work templates are intended for manual customization and authorized decisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#eff6fa;border:2px solid #42728f;border-radius:11px;padding:18px 21px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"color:#173d59;margin:0 0 9px\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 digital customer files in a ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e five Swedish work templates, one Swedish user guide and one English User Guide. All seven documents are delivered both as editable Word files (DOCX) and searchable PDF versions. In addition, a macro-free Excel workbook (XLSX) with nine tabs is included. The 14 Word and PDF files correspond to seven different documents in two formats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#eff6fa;border:2px solid #42728f;border-radius:11px;padding:18px 21px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"color:#173d59;margin:0 0 9px\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eDecommissioning plan with responsibilities, dependency and integration inventory, data archive and retention decisions, technical system shutdown with access termination, final check and decommissioning certificate, plus two guides. The Excel register provides a manual dashboard for archiving decisions, decommissioning steps, open actions and sign-offs. The files do not shut down any systems or delete any data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's Included – Document by Document\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"overflow-x:auto\"\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr style=\"background:#e8f1f7\"\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eTemplate\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eContent and Purpose\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:9px;text-align:left\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDecommissioning Plan \u0026amp; Responsibilities\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDecision roles, criticality, affected systems, timeline, stop criteria and GO\/NO-GO.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDependencies \u0026amp; Integration Inventory\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eAPIs, transfers, reports, service accounts, process owners, receiving systems and verification points.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eData Archive, Retention \u0026amp; Disposal Decisions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSeparate decisions for accounting information, personal data and other data categories; readability and archiving responsibilities.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eTechnical Shutdown \u0026amp; Access Termination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eStopping jobs and integrations, access rights, licenses, system dependencies and controlled technical post-checks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eFinal Check \u0026amp; Decommissioning Certificate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eCheck archives, decommissioned dependencies, remaining risks, outstanding points and internal final test.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eSwedish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eStep-by-step workflow, information retention, security boundaries and Excel instructions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish guidance for the Swedish work templates, not translated main documents.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eExcel – Control Register\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px;vertical-align:top\"\u003eNine tabs for systems, dependencies, data objects, archiving decisions, decommissioning steps, actions and sign-offs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #dce5ec;padding:9px\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy is a decommissioning plan needed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTerminating a license, shutting down a server or removing an integration is not necessarily the same as decommissioning an IT system. The system may still contain accounting information, personal data, contract documentation or critical dependencies for reporting and other services. If this is not checked before decommissioning, the organization may lose access to information it is required to retain or leave unauthorized access points operational.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a dedicated decommissioning plan, it becomes clearer who is responsible for decisions on retention, disposal, technical shutdown, user communication and final approved reconciliation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel register with nine tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbook contains \u003cstrong\u003eDashboard, Read Me, Systems, Dependencies, Data Objects, Archiving Decisions, Shutdown Steps, Actions and Sign-offs\u003c\/strong\u003e. The tabs are designed for manual system IDs, dependency IDs, information categories, protected evidence references and responsible functions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dashboard summarizes nine key metrics, including the number of registered systems, verified shutdowns, dependencies, deviations, data categories, archiving decisions and open actions. A status marked as complete in Excel \u003cstrong\u003eis not in itself proof\u003c\/strong\u003e that an application has been shut down, that an archive copy can be read or that data has been deleted. The results must be verified in the actual systems. No macros, automated system integrations or built-in deletion functions are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the template package – seven steps\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDefine the system and scope:\u003c\/strong\u003e specify the owner, system ID, environments, users, business processes and desired end date.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory dependencies:\u003c\/strong\u003e document APIs, scheduled jobs, reports, data flows, service identities and receiving systems. Check that replacement solutions are operational.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eClassify information categories:\u003c\/strong\u003e distinguish between accounting information, personal data, contracts, technical documentation and other documents. Do not decide on general deletion for all data.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMake specific archiving and disposal decisions:\u003c\/strong\u003e document the legal basis, retention period, person responsible for archiving and how the information can actually be read during the relevant retention period.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlan the shutdown:\u003c\/strong\u003e determine the order, stop rules, technical responsibility, access rights, licenses and handling of remaining backup and test copies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExecute and verify:\u003c\/strong\u003e authorized IT personnel perform any system changes in the live environment and verify the result. Excel is used only for status and evidence references.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFinal approval:\u003c\/strong\u003e document actual checks, remaining risk, outstanding points and the decision of the responsible person.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal requirements in Sweden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGDPR – data minimization:\u003c\/strong\u003e Personal data may not be retained longer than necessary for the purpose. When it is no longer needed, it must normally be deleted or anonymized unless there is another basis for continued retention. The Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection (IMY) also explains that certain documents may need to be saved under, for example, the Swedish Accounting Act. See \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/grundlaggande-principer\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eIMY's basic principles under GDPR\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRetention of accounting information:\u003c\/strong\u003e Chapter 7, Section 2 of the Swedish Accounting Act (1999:1078) generally requires that accounting information be retained until the end of the seventh calendar year after the end of the financial year in which the financial year ended. The company must also be able to read and present the information during the retention period. The original software does not always need to be retained if the information can be retained and presented in an approved manner. See \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/bokforingslag-19991078_sfs-1999-1078\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003ethe Swedish Accounting Act on the Swedish Parliament's website\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.bfn.se\/wp-content\/uploads\/vl13-2-bokforing.pdf\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003ethe Swedish Accounting Standards Board's guidance on accounting and archiving\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNo general disposal rule:\u003c\/strong\u003e Different information categories may be subject to different retention rules or contractual requirements. Shutting down an application does not mean that all data must always be deleted or that data can be saved indefinitely. Archiving decisions require an individual assessment of the information category, purpose, legal basis and access rights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical security work:\u003c\/strong\u003e Termination of access rights, closed integrations, data export and backup checks are carried out in the organization's actual IT environment. The template does not provide automatic deletion, a technical security guarantee, an audit report or legal certification. Do not store passwords, API keys, sensitive data dumps or raw personal registers in Excel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a system decommissioning plan?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA plan showing how an IT system is to be shut down in a controlled manner, including responsibilities, timeline, technical dependencies, data archive, any disposal decisions and verification after shutdown.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I delete all data when an IT system is shut down?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not without a separate assessment. Some data should no longer be saved when the purpose has ended, while other data may be subject to statutory retention or other obligations. Assess each information category separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need to keep my old accounting system for seven years?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot necessarily. The key is that the accounting information is correctly retained and can still be read and presented in accordance with applicable requirements. The original software does not always need to be retained if the information can be retained and presented in an approved manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between system decommissioning and supplier termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSupplier termination focuses primarily on the contractual relationship, access and handover between parties. System decommissioning concerns the decommissioning of the application itself, its data categories, integrations and technical operations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel terminate access rights and delete data?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel contains only registers and manual status values. System changes, export, access control, archiving and actual deletion must be carried out and verified in dedicated tools with appropriate access controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow do I handle backups after decommissioning?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIdentify backup copies and their separate retention, access and deletion requirements. A production shutdown is not proof that all backup copies have disappeared. Actually check the outcome and responsibilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDF files fillable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThey are searchable read-only and print versions. Word is used for editing and Excel for structured follow-up. Interactive PDF forms are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all templates in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe five main templates are in Swedish. One Swedish and one English user guide are included. English User Guide does not mean that the main templates are translated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eComplementary Products\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor ongoing system ownership, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/systemforvaltningsplan-it-systemregister-2026-2027-systemagare-risker-arshjul-svenska-english-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eSystem Management Plan \u0026amp; IT System Register\u003c\/a\u003e. For migration to a replacement platform, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/datamigreringsplan-systembyte-faltmappning-excel\"\u003eData Migration Plan \u0026amp; System Change\u003c\/a\u003e (may be unpublished). For separate technical erasure of equipment, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/saker-dataradering-it-avveckling-raderingsprotokoll-excel\"\u003eSecure Data Erasure \u0026amp; IT Equipment Decommissioning\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProduct Facts and Digital Delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVersion 1.0, 29 October 2026. Digital ZIP with 15 files: 7 DOCX, 7 searchable PDFs and 1 XLSX. AI-assisted legal source check against IMY, the Swedish Accounting Act and BFN's guidance. No external legal review or actual technical decommissioning has been performed. The file is manually linked to the correct Shopify variant by the seller before a test order and publication.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56383223529814,"sku":"IT-AVVECKLING-DATAARKIV-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/it-systemavveckling-applikationsstangning-huvudbild_43d31fcf-06c8-4757-9249-2cc200c60ed2.png?v=1793281886"},{"product_id":"molnkostnadsbudget-finops-kostnadsallokering-excel","title":"Cloud Cost Budget \u0026 FinOps – Cost Allocation, Forecasting, and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCloud Cost Budget \u0026amp; FinOps\u003c\/strong\u003e – a professional document package for businesses that want to gain control over cloud infrastructure costs, allocate shared consumption between projects and cost centers, and monitor budgets, forecasts, and actual cost variances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou get editable Swedish Word templates, searchable PDF versions, and an Excel register with nine tabs. The package is suitable for IT managers, finance functions, system owners, project managers, and businesses that use AWS, Microsoft Azure, Google Cloud, or other consumption-based cloud services. The templates are \u003cstrong\u003evendor-neutral\u003c\/strong\u003e and do not connect to these platforms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#EEF5FA;border:2px solid #416E8A;border-radius:12px;padding:18px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"color:#163E5B;margin:0 0 8px\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 digital files:\u003c\/strong\u003e five Swedish working templates, a Swedish user guide, and an English User Guide. All seven documents are available as editable Word (DOCX) and corresponding searchable PDF files. In addition, there is a macro-free Excel register (XLSX) with nine tabs. This consists of seven unique documents in two formats, not fourteen different templates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#EEF5FA;border:2px solid #416E8A;border-radius:12px;padding:18px 20px;margin:20px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"color:#163E5B;margin:0 0 8px\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eCloud cost budget with accountability model, cost inventory, and cost centers; allocation rules for shared costs; FinOps forecast and budget variance; optimization and decision protocols; and two guides. The Excel file contains Dashboard, Read Me, Budget, Costs, Allocation, Forecasts, Optimization, Variances, and Decisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAll Templates – Content and Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"overflow-x:auto\"\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr style=\"background:#e8f1f7\"\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:10px\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:10px\"\u003eWhat You Can Document\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:10px\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eCloud Cost Budget \u0026amp; Accountability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eBudget period, included accounts, responsible parties, financial boundaries, and agreed monitoring.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eCost Inventory \u0026amp; Cost Centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eActual accounts, resource services, tagging, cost owners, invoice references, and unallocated costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eCost Allocation \u0026amp; Allocation Keys\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eShared cloud costs, documented allocation rules, reconciliation to source cost, and recipients.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eFinOps Forecast \u0026amp; Budget Variance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eBase period, development assumptions, simple forecast, comparison to budget, and explanation of differences.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eOptimization Plan \u0026amp; Decision Protocol\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eAssess potential cost savings with technical risk assessment, decision mandate, and post-implementation review.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eSwedish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eWorkflow, allocation principles, calculation examples, and how to interpret the results in the Excel sheets.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eEnglish usage guide for the Swedish main templates, not a full translation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eDOCX + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eExcel Register and Dashboard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eNine tabs for budget, registered costs, internal allocation, forecasts, optimization, variances, and decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border:1px solid #d4e1e9\"\u003eXLSX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBudget, Actuals, and Forecast in an Excel Register\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel workbook helps you record an agreed budget per period and cost center, enter verified actual costs, and compile a simple forecast. Formulas calculate \u003cstrong\u003eforecast = historical base amount × (1 + manually entered change)\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003eforecast variance = forecast − budget\u003c\/strong\u003e when the relevant figures are filled in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cstrong\u003eAllocation\u003c\/strong\u003e tab, \u003cstrong\u003eallocated cost = shared cost × manually entered percentage\u003c\/strong\u003e is calculated. If a shared cost is to be fully allocated, the recipients' percentages must add up to 100 percent. This must be checked against the correct source documentation and allocation ID. \u003cstrong\u003eAllocation is not a new invoice or an additional cost.\u003c\/strong\u003e The amount must therefore not be added on top of actual total costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dashboard contains nine key metrics, including registered budget items, budget and verified actual costs in SEK, budget variance, allocation lines, manual forecasts, verified savings, and open cost variances. It summarizes \u003cstrong\u003eall registered periods in the workbook\u003c\/strong\u003e – not automatically just the current month.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExcel does not retrieve prices, exchange rates, cloud invoices, or consumption measurements from any API. No cloud accounts are created or modified. The customer version contains no pre-filled actuals or fictitious customer costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use the Template Package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDetermine the scope and period.\u003c\/strong\u003e Select which vendors, accounts, projects, and cost centers are included. Use a consistent reporting currency, such as SEK excluding VAT.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory actual costs.\u003c\/strong\u003e Retrieve source documentation via the authorized cloud portal or billing system and record the actual amount, period, and source reference once per cost line.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAllocate shared expenses.\u003c\/strong\u003e Select a documented allocation key, such as measured consumption, and have the responsible finance function verify that the allocation adds up to the source amount.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstablish a budget.\u003c\/strong\u003e Enter the agreed amount and responsible function for each period and cost center.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCreate a clearly labeled forecast.\u003c\/strong\u003e Specify a comparable base period and assumptions about volume, pricing, currency, and changes. Separate the forecast from actual expenditure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssess potential improvements.\u003c\/strong\u003e Identify, for example, unused resources, undersizing, or network costs, and document risks to security, performance, and agreements before a measure is decided.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonitor actual results.\u003c\/strong\u003e Verify the cost impact in actual, comparable periods. An estimated saving is not automatically a realized saving.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFinOps Methodology, Finance, and Important Boundaries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe FinOps Foundation describes FinOps as a framework for creating cost transparency, shared accountability, and an ongoing practice to \u003cstrong\u003einform, optimize, and monitor\u003c\/strong\u003e technology and cloud costs. See the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.finops.org\/framework\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eFinOps Framework\u003c\/a\u003e and the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.finops.org\/framework\/phases\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eFinOps Phases\u003c\/a\u003e. FinOps itself is \u003cstrong\u003enot Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, and the package is not certified or officially approved by the FinOps Foundation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe allocation of shared costs is covered in particular in the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/framework.finops.org\/framework\/capabilities\/allocation\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eFinOps Foundation Guidance on Allocation\u003c\/a\u003e, where account structure, tags, metadata, accountability, and allocation methods are central. The templates help you document your own model – no standardized allocation key is right for every organization.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBudgeting and accounting are not the same thing.\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a calculation and decision template, not billing, accounting, tax reporting, an approval system, or an auditor-reviewed forecast. The treatment of VAT, exchange rates, credits, discounts, accruals, prepayments, and the split between capital and operating costs should be assessed based on the company's actual agreements and accounting principles. Do not use the sum of allocated costs as an additional cost item.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe files do not contain any automatic Azure, AWS, or Google Cloud integrations, and they do not store cloud account passwords or API keys. Technical changes to reduce costs require separate authorization and risk assessment. No external legal or accounting review has been conducted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does FinOps mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFinOps is a practice where technology, finance, and business collaborate on visible, explained, and monitorable technology and cloud costs. It is about business value and accountability, not just about reducing expenses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between a cloud cost budget and a license register?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cloud cost budget focuses on variable consumption costs for, for example, computing, storage, and networking, and their allocation over time. A license register primarily focuses on the number of licenses, subscriptions, and contract periods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel import invoices from AWS or Azure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Cost data is entered or pasted manually from authorized source documentation. No automatic data import, integration, or cloud API is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does cost allocation mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAllocating a cost that has already been incurred between receiving projects, services, or cost centers according to an agreed method. It does not create new costs and must be reconcilable to the original source documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel calculate cost forecasts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, a simple forecast is calculated from a manually entered base and change factor. This is not an advanced statistical forecast or a guaranteed future expenditure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it safe to use 100 percent allocation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt may be appropriate when a shared cost is to be fully allocated, but the allocation key and the recipients' percentages must be documented and compared against the same source cost ID.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the PDFs fillable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe PDFs are searchable read-only versions. Edit the Word files and use Excel for register monitoring. Interactive PDF forms are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all templates available in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe five main templates are in Swedish. A Swedish user guide and a separate English User Guide are included, but the Swedish working templates are not fully translated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eComplementary Templates from Mallbutiken\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor separate monitoring of SaaS licenses, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/licensregister-saas-kostnadsuppfoljning-2026-2027-excel-word-pdf\"\u003eLicense Register \u0026amp; SaaS Cost Monitoring\u003c\/a\u003e. For technical resource requirements and load testing, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-kapacitetsplanering-belastningstest-prognos-excel\"\u003eIT Capacity Planning \u0026amp; Load Testing\u003c\/a\u003e. For system ownership, risks, and the annual cycle, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/systemforvaltningsplan-it-systemregister-2026-2027-systemagare-risker-arshjul-svenska-english-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eSystem Management Plan \u0026amp; IT System Register\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVersion, Format, and Digital Delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVersion 1.0, dated October 29, 2026. Total of 15 files in ZIP: 7 DOCX, 7 searchable PDFs, and 1 XLSX. AI-assisted check against official FinOps sources. No external legal, auditor, or consultant review. The digital ZIP delivery is manually linked to the Shopify variant before test ordering and publication.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56385632633174,"sku":"FINOPS-MOLNKOSTNAD-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/molnkostnadsbudget-finops-huvudbild_8c6c0540-be10-4dba-9ec9-00aeb6c64931.png?v=1793284185"},{"product_id":"teknisk-skuld-forbattringsbacklogg-adr-excel","title":"Technical Debt \u0026 Improvement Backlog – Prioritization Matrix, ADR and Excel | Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnical Debt \u0026amp; Improvement Backlog – editable Word templates, searchable PDFs, and Excel registers.\u003c\/strong\u003e Get a unified approach to identifying technical limitations in IT systems, prioritizing improvements, documenting architecture decisions, and tracking whether technical measures have delivered the desired results.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor Swedish companies, system owners, development teams, IT managers, product owners, and technical architects. The package distinguishes between \u003cstrong\u003eobserved technical debt\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eassessed risk and estimated effort\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eformal prioritization decisions\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003etechnically verified improvements\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is administrative documentation – not a code analysis tool, AI-based vulnerability scanner, issue management platform, or automated DevOps integration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#EFF6FA;border:2px solid #3D6E90;border-radius:11px;padding:18px 20px;margin:18px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#173D59\"\u003e01. Package Contents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e15 customer files in a digital ZIP:\u003c\/strong\u003e five Swedish work templates, one Swedish guide, and one English User Guide. Each of the seven documents is included as an editable Word (DOCX) file and a corresponding searchable PDF. In addition, a macro-free Excel workbook (XLSX) with nine tabs is included. Seven Word files and seven PDFs correspond to seven different documents – not 14 separate work templates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#EFF6FA;border:2px solid #3D6E90;border-radius:11px;padding:18px 20px;margin:18px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 style=\"margin:0 0 8px;color:#173D59\"\u003e02. What the Files Contain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003eTechnical debt and accountability policy, registration and assessment of technical limitations, improvement backlog and prioritization decisions, architecture decisions (ADR), action and verification protocols, Swedish and English guides, and an Excel register with risk values, manual status selections, and a dashboard. The files do not automatically analyze any source code or system environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDocument Package – File-by-File Contents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"overflow-x:auto\"\u003e\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr style=\"background:#e8f1f7\"\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:10px;text-align:left\"\u003eFile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:10px;text-align:left\"\u003eWhat You Document\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"padding:10px;text-align:left\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e01. Technical Debt \u0026amp; Accountability Policy\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDefine debt types, technical ownership, internal review cycles, risk accountability, and decision authority.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed\"\u003eWord + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e02. Technical Debt – Registration \u0026amp; Assessment\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDebt ID, factual observation, impact, risk value, estimated effort, and dependencies.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed\"\u003eWord + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e03. Prioritization \u0026amp; Improvement Backlog\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003eAssess risk and business impact, determine order, justify deferred items, and track decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed\"\u003eWord + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e04. Architecture Decisions – ADR\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003eDocument technical choices, alternatives, consequences, the adopted decision, and the superseded previous decision.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed\"\u003eWord + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e05. Action Verification \u0026amp; Closure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003eAcceptance criteria, actual post-testing, evidence, remaining points, and authorized final sign-off.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed\"\u003eWord + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e06. Swedish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003ePractical organization, how to use Excel, risk scores, source references, and methodological limitations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed\"\u003eWord + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e07. English User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003eEnglish instructions for using the main Swedish templates.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed\"\u003eWord + searchable PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e08. Excel Register\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed;vertical-align:top\"\u003eNine tabs with a dashboard, debt register, prioritization, decisions, architecture, actions, verification, and risks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border:1px solid #d9e5ed\"\u003eExcel (XLSX)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is Technical Debt?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTechnical debt can arise, among other things, when a system's code, tests, documentation, integrations, or architecture are no longer sufficiently sustainable to meet business needs. This can lead to difficult maintenance, recurring errors, reduced scalability, slower development, or increased change risks. A debt item should describe an actual limitation supported by traceable evidence, not merely a preference for a different technical solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe improvement backlog is used to determine what needs to be addressed now, later, or investigated. It is not always right to pay off all technical debt items immediately: risk, business benefit, customer impact, dependencies, and resource effort must be weighed against each other.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcel with Nine Tabs and a Clear Dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel workbook contains \u003cstrong\u003eDashboard, Read Me, Debt Register, Prioritization, Decisions, Architecture, Actions, Verification, and Risks\u003c\/strong\u003e. The tabs include fields for unique debt IDs, systems and components, technical and business owners, source references, status, decisions, estimated effort, and actual verification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cstrong\u003eDebt Register\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003eRisks\u003c\/strong\u003e tabs, users can enter impact and probability on internal scales of 1–5. \u003cstrong\u003eThe risk value is calculated as impact × probability\u003c\/strong\u003e, resulting in a score of 1–25 when both values are entered. The dashboard displays nine key metrics, including registered debt items, items with a risk value of 15–25, planned and ongoing actions, verified improvements, adopted ADRs, open risk items, and the total estimated effort.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Scores of 15–25 are merely illustrative internal signals for further review, not a universally established risk measure, regulatory requirement, or automatic decision threshold. All results are based on manually entered register data. Excel cannot automatically assess code quality, retrieve GitHub issues, check code reviews, or prove that a technical risk has been mitigated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Work with the Templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIdentify the debt item:\u003c\/strong\u003e document the observed limitation, system component, and verifiable source, such as a measurement, incident follow-up, code review, or architecture analysis.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDefine the scope:\u003c\/strong\u003e distinguish debt from feature requests, technical vulnerabilities, already planned changes, and pure documentation requests.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssess impact and probability:\u003c\/strong\u003e use the organization's defined scales, document uncertainties, and record the responsible risk owner.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimate the effort:\u003c\/strong\u003e assess the likely workload, system dependencies, testing requirements, operational risk, and user impact. Keep the estimate separate from actual time spent.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrioritize and make a decision:\u003c\/strong\u003e combine risk level, business impact, and effort. Explicitly indicate what should be addressed, investigated, deferred, or accepted as a risk.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDocument architecture decisions:\u003c\/strong\u003e use the ADR template for major technical decisions. State the context, real alternatives, justification, consequences, and whether the decision supersedes a previous ADR.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImplement and verify:\u003c\/strong\u003e apply the organization's standard requirements for code review, testing, and release. Link actual evidence and post-implementation checks to the correct debt ID.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eClose or reconsider:\u003c\/strong\u003e a debt item is closed only after authorized review or with clearly documented remaining points. Deferred risks must be followed up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMethodology and Sources – Defining the Right Scope\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMicrosoft Learn – Identify Technical Debt\u003c\/strong\u003e covers finding and managing technical debt, code quality, and planning code reviews. See \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learn.microsoft.com\/en-us\/training\/modules\/identify-technical-debt\/\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eMicrosoft's training module on technical debt\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMicrosoft Azure Well-Architected\u003c\/strong\u003e recommends Architecture Decision Records (ADR) for significant technical choices, including context, decided alternatives, justification, consequences, and links to previous decisions. See \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learn.microsoft.com\/en-us\/azure\/well-architected\/architect-role\/architecture-decision-record\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eMicrosoft's guidance on ADR\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAWS Well-Architected\u003c\/strong\u003e describes a continuous approach to reviewing workloads and prioritizing improvements as part of regular development planning. See \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/docs.aws.amazon.com\/wellarchitected\/latest\/operational-excellence-pillar\/ops_evolve_ops_process_cont_imp.html\" rel=\"nofollow\"\u003eAWS on continuous improvement\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is \u003cstrong\u003etechnical guidance and voluntary methodology\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a Swedish law generally requiring a specific technical debt register or a particular risk formula. Businesses that process personal data or are subject to security, sector, or contractual requirements may have separate obligations that must be assessed based on actual circumstances. Do not enter passwords, API keys, sensitive customer data, or raw security logs in the Word or Excel files.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions About Technical Debt\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat Is a Technical Debt Improvement Backlog?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA prioritized list of identified technical deficiencies that need to be addressed, investigated, or followed up. Each item should have an owner, traceable evidence, impact, estimated effort, and a documented decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow Does Technical Debt Differ from a Regular Bug?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA bug is typically a concrete error in a feature. Technical debt can concern the system's structure, testability, maintainability, or dependencies, and may exist even when current features appear to work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan Excel Calculate Which Improvements We Must Make First?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Excel calculates a simple internal risk value based on the impact and probability entered by the user. Real prioritization requires human judgment of the system's business importance, costs, dependencies, and security risks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat Does ADR Mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eArchitecture Decision Record is a briefly documented architecture decision that describes the technical choice made, why alternatives were rejected, and the expected consequences of the decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I Change a Previously Adopted ADR?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor traceability, it is often better to create a new ADR that supersedes the previous one. This allows previous decisions and the reasons behind them to be tracked retrospectively.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan This Package Replace Jira, GitHub, or Azure DevOps?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package is a vendor-neutral administrative foundation, and it contains no automated integrations, code reviews, CI\/CD tests, or issue synchronization.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow Do I Know a Debt Item Has Been Mitigated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn authorized function must check the acceptance criteria applicable to the issue, for example through approved tests, code review, or measurable improvement. A green status in Excel is not sufficient evidence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the Templates in Swedish or English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe five main templates are in Swedish. One Swedish user guide and one separate English User Guide are included; the main templates are not fully translated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated Products on Mallbutiken\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor documented functional and non-functional requirements, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/kravspecifikation-affarskrav-kravmatris-acceptanskriterier-excel\"\u003eRequirements Specification \u0026amp; Business Requirements\u003c\/a\u003e. When a technical decision requires a formal change process, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/it-andringsbegaran-andringsstyrning-word-pdf-excel\"\u003eIT Change Request \u0026amp; Change Management\u003c\/a\u003e. For actual deployment, see \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/releasehantering-driftsattningsplan-gonogo-excel\"\u003eRelease Management \u0026amp; Deployment Plan\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProduct Facts and Digital Delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVersion 1.0 · October 29, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e 15 files in a digital ZIP: 7 DOCX, 7 searchable PDFs, and 1 XLSX. Swedish main templates and English user guide. AI-assisted methodology check against official Microsoft and AWS sources. No external legal or security expert review, code audit, actual technical action, or certification has been performed. The ZIP file is linked to Shopify Digital Products. Feel free to test the download after future changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56386516025686,"sku":"TEKNISK-SKULD-ADR-V1","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/teknisk-skuld-forbattringsbacklogg-huvudbild_a5c0c981-6973-41b4-ae21-1021c30fd1ef.png?v=1793284898"}],"url":"https:\/\/mallbutiken.se\/en\/collections\/it-drift-systemforvaltning-mallar.oembed","provider":"Mallbutiken","version":"1.0","type":"link"}